The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutCD Disk Part 2SPECIFICATIONS/PROJECT MANUAL FOR EAST DISTRICT MAINTENANCE ADDITION Located in Veteran’s Park, 3100 Harvey Rd. FOR City of College Station: Parks & Recreation Dept. College Station, TX March 4, 2014 PROJECT MANUAL FOR City of College Station EAST DISTRICT MAINTENANCE ADDITION Veteran’s Park, College Station, TX March 2014 Owner:City of College Station Parks & Recreation Dept. PO Box 9960 College Station, TX 77842 T: 979.764.3795 Architect:Hawkins Architecture, Inc. 7607 Eastmark Dr Suite 200 College Station, TX 77840 T: 979.693.3179 F: 979.693.8370 Civil:O’Malley Engineering 203 S. Jackson Brenham, TX 77833 T: 979.836.7937 F: Structural:Gessner Engineering, LLP PO BOX 10763 2501 Ashford Drive College Station, TX 77842 T: 979.680.8840 F: 979.680.8841 Mechanical:Swoboda Engineering Electrical 7010 Coyote Run Plumbing Bryan, TX 77808 T: 979.774.3400 F: 979.731.1500 THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PROPER DOUBLE SIDED PRINTING. SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 0 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Section 000101 PROJECT TITLE PAGE Section 000107 SEALS PAGE Section 000115 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS Section 003132 GEOTECHNICAL DATA DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 011000 SUMMARY Section 012300 ALTERNATES Section 012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES Section 013100 NOTIFICATION OF THE ARCHITECT Section 013110 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS Section 013120 BUILDING CODES Section 013130 JOB REQUIREMENTS Section 013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION Section 013233 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION Section 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Section 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Section 015639 TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION Section 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Section 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Section 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS DIVISION 2 - EXISTING CONDITIONS Section 024119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE Section 033000 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE DIVISION 4 - MASONRY Section 042200 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY DIVISION 5 - METALS DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY Section 064116 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED CABINETS TABLE OF CONTENTS CITY OF COLLEGE STATION VETERAN'S PARK MAINTENANCE BUILDING City of College Station College Station, TX TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE CONTROL Section 072100 THERMAL INSULATION Section 072500 WEATHER BARRIERS Section 074113 METAL ROOF PANELS Section 074213 MEATL WALL PANELS DIVISION 8 - OPENINGS Section 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Section 083613 SECTIONAL DOORS Section 087100 DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED) Section 088000 GLAZING DIVISION 9 - FINISHES Section 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Section 092900 GYPSUM BOARD Section 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES Section 099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING Section 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES Section 104416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Section 133419 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING ALL Specified on Drawings DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING ALL Specified on Drawings DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL ALL Specified on Drawings DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY DIVISION 31-EARTHWORK Section 313116 TERMITE CONTROL OE Job No. 675.005-PA/PB Page 1 of 1 CITY OF COLLEGE STATION MAINTENANCE ADDITION March 5, 2013 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS – CIVIL DESIGN TABLE OF CONTENTS SPECIFICATION NUMBER TITLE B/CS Unified Specifications 02 41 13.13 Removal of Existing Concrete 03 30 00 Concrete 31 11 00 Clearing and Grubbing 31 23 23.53 Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill 31 23 00 Excavation and Embankment 31 23 33 Excavating, Trenching & Backfilling 31 25 13 Erosion and Sedimentation Control 31 50 00 Trench Safety 32 92 19 Seeding for Erosion Control 32 11 16 Subgrade Preparation and Compaction 32 11 29.02 Rolling 32 11 34 Cement Stabilization of Materials in Place 32 13 13 Concrete Pavement 33 40 01 Storm Drainage System 33 40 02 Reinforced Concrete Pipe 33 42 16.13 Standard Storm Sewer Inlets 33 40 04 Reinforced Concrete Riprap O’Malley Engineers Specifications 32 31 13 Chain Link Fence O’Malley Engineers, LLP, Brenham, Texas, TBPE No. F-3244 CITY OF COLLEGE STATION EAST DISTRICT MAINTENANCE ADDITION March 2013 DRAWING & SCHEDULES INDEX Sheet Description A0.0 COVER A0.1 GENERAL INFORMATION A0.2 ADA/TAS GUIDELINES A0.3 ADA/TAS GUIDELINES A0.4 LIFE-SAFETY PLANS A0.5 SITE SURVEY C1.0 SITE GRADING, DRAINAGE, AND EROSION CONTROL PLAN C2.0 CIVIL DETAILS C3.0 CIVIL DETAILS A1.0 SITE PLAN A1.1 DEMOLITION PLAN A1.2 FLOOR PLAN A1.3 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A1.4 ROOF PLAN A2.1 BUILDING ELEVATIONS A2.2 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A3.1 FULL BUILDING SECTIONS A3.2 FULL WALL SECTIONS A3.3 FULL WALL SECTIONS A5.1 TYPICAL WALL SECTIONS A5.2 DOOR AND WINDOW DETAILS A5.3 ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS A5.4 ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS A5.5 ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS A6.1 ARCHITECTURAL SCHEDULES A7.0 PERSPECTIVES S0.0 NOTES S1.1 FOUNDATION PLAN S1.2 WALL FRAMING PLAN S1.3 CANOPY FND & FRM PLANS S5.1 FOUNDATION DETAILS S5.2 FRAMING DETAILS MEP 1.1 MEP SPECIFICATIONS MP 1.1 MECHANICAL/PLUMBING PLAN E1.1 ELECTRICAL POWER PLAN E1.2 ELECTRICAL LIGHTING PLAN THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PROPER DOUBLE SIDED PRINTING. SECTION 003132 - GEOTECHNICAL DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 THE REPORT A. The pages contained herein have been reproduced from the Geotechnical Investigation at the proposed project site. The boring plan, results of laboratory tests, and description of strata for each test hole are indicated. B. The report was prepared by Gessner Engineering and based on soil borings taken at the project site on or about December, 2012. Addendum to report is dated March 19, 2013. This is located at the end of the original Geotechnical Report. C. A complete copy of this report is included in the following pages of this section. This report was furnished to the Architect and is inserted for information purposes. 1.02 SOIL CONDITIONS A. The conditions indicated in the report were known to exist at the location shown on the date the tests were performed; however, these boring logs are for the Contractor's consideration only, and he shall visit the site and fully acquaint himself with the existing conditions and be prepared to complete all work required by the documents. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Used) SEE ATTACHED REPORT (28 pages)  • • . 11 24 28 12 27 31 17 35 42 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 Depth (feet)Allowable Bearing Capacity (kips) Pier Skin Friction Capacity Curve 16 Inch 18 Inch 24 Inch • • o o o o o o COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS N 5 10 15 20 2204 South Chappell Hill Street Brenham, Texas 77833 (979) 836-6855 No Recovery Augering (Disturbed) Sample Water Level After Initial Water Level Standard Penetration Test Sample Shelby Tube Sample Coring Sample P.O. Box 10763 College Station, Texas 77842 (979) 680-8840 25 Description of Stratum Very Dense Light Brown Clayey Sand (SC)Depth(in feet)TERMINATED AT 20 FEET TRACE OF WATER AT COMPLETION 4.0 -- 18Sample Type &Soil SymbolWaterLevelPenetrometeror Blow CountCompressiveStrengthTons/Sq. Ft.% Passing#200 Sieve (%)3.5 2.5 --Bar LinearShrinkage (%)9.2620 -- 8.5519 111.6LiquidLimit (%)PlasticityIndexMoistureContent (%)Dry DensityLbs./Cu. Ft.-- 1.2 PROJECT: CLIENT: DATE: DRILLER: Veterans Park Maintenance Bldg. Addition 3101 Harvey Road College Station, Texas Mr. Andrew Hawkins November 7, 2012 Gessner Engineering 12-0585 SOIL TECHNICIAN: KN LOG OF BORE HOLE PROJECT NO: #1 N: 30° 38.585' W: 96° 17.725' Flat, Moderate Grass BORING NO. LOCATION: BORING TYPE: Core/Auger GROUND ELEV: 1.0 1.0 18 --4.4418 ---- 4.0 0.5 3.0 4.5 2.0 2.0 1.0 19.5'-20': Firm Gray Wet Sand (SP) 5 10 15 20 2204 South Chappell Hill Street Brenham, Texas 77833 (979) 836-6855 No Recovery Augering (Disturbed) Sample Water Level After Initial Water Level Standard Penetration Test Sample Shelby Tube Sample Coring Sample P.O. Box 10763 College Station, Texas 77842 (979) 680-8840 25 Description of Stratum Very Dense Light Brown and Gray Clayey Sand (SC) Hard Gray Clay (CL) -w/ Some Sand Seams and Sand Layers Very Dense Tan Clayey Sand (SC) -w/ Some Clay Seams and GravelDepth(in feet)TERMINATED AT 20 FEET TRACE OF WATER AT COMPLETION 4.5+ 4.5+ --Sample Type &Soil SymbolWaterLevelPenetrometeror Blow CountCompressiveStrengthTons/Sq. Ft.% Passing#200 Sieve (%)4.5+ --Bar LinearShrinkage (%)11.81123 100.6 0.39 111.0 -- 7.01426 --LiquidLimit (%)PlasticityIndexMoistureContent (%)Dry DensityLbs./Cu. Ft.-- PROJECT: CLIENT: DATE: DRILLER: Veterans Park Maintenace Bldg. Addition 3101 Harvey Road College Station, Texas Mr. Andrew Hawkins November 7, 2012 Gessner Engineering 12-0585 SOIL TECHNICIAN: KN LOG OF BORE HOLE PROJECT NO: #2 N: 30° 38.586' W: 96° 17.720' Flat, Moderate Grass BORING NO. LOCATION: BORING TYPE: Core/Auger GROUND ELEV: 4.5+ 4.5+ 4.5+44 --8.11325 121.5 8.32 1.25 Very Dense to Medium Dense Tan Clayey Sand (SC) GLOSSARY OF GEOLOGIC TERMS Aphanitic - dense, homogeneous rock with constituents so fine that they cannot be seen by the naked eye Argillaceous - containing, made of, or resembling clay; clayey Bentonitic - an absorbent aluminum silicate clay formed from volcanic ash and used in various adhesives, cements, and ceramic fillers Carbonaceous - consisting of, containing, relating to, or yielding carbon Chert - a siliceous rock of chalcedonic or opaline silica occurring in limestone Conchoidal - of, relating to, or being a surface characterized by smooth, shell-like convexities and concavities, as on fractured obsidian Crossbedded - intersecting layers of distinct soil deposits Fluviatile - produced by the action of a river or stream Fossiliferous - containing fossils Friable - readily crumbled, brittle Glauconitic - a greenish mineral of the mica group, a hydrous silicate of potassium, iron, aluminum, or magnesium found in greensand and used as a fertilizer and water softener Gypsiferous - containing gypsum; a widespread colorless, white, or yellowish mineral, used in the manufacture of various plaster products, and fertilizers Igneous - rocks formed by solidification from a molten state; pyrogenic Inclusion - a solid, liquid, or gaseous foreign body enclosed in a mineral or rock. Indurated - hardened soil that has been changed by extreme climate Laminated - a soil deposit divided into thin layers Lateritic - pertaining to red residual soil in humid tropical and subtropical regions that is leached of soluble minerals, aluminum hydroxides, and silica but still contains concentrations of iron oxides and iron hydroxides. Lenticular - lens-shaped grains of soil or rock Lignitic - pertaining to soft, brownish-black coal in which the alteration of vegetable matter has proceeded further than in peat but not as far as in bituminous coal; also called brown coal Marl - a loose and crumbling earthy deposit consisting mainly of calcite or dolomite; used as a fertilizer for soils deficient in lime Metamorphic - rocks changed in structure or composition as a result of metamorphism caused by chemical reaction or heat and pressure Micaceous - containing mica; any of a group of chemically and physically related aluminum silicate minerals, common in igneous and metamorphic rocks, characteristically splitting into flexible sheets used in insulation and electrical equipment Montmorillonitic - clays that are comprised mostly of montmorillonite; one of the three types of clay soil grains (illite, kaolinite, and montmorillonite) Morphology - refers to the geological characteristics, configuration, and evolution of rocks and land forms Porous - admitting the passage of gas or liquid through pores or interstices Pyrite - a brass-colored mineral occurring widely and used as an iron ore and in producing sulfur dioxide for sulfuric acid; also called fool's gold Scarp - a long steep slope or cliff at the edge of a plateau or ridge; usually formed by erosion Siliceous - containing, resembling, relating to, or consisting of silica; a white or colorless crystalline compound occurring abundantly as quartz, sand, flint, agate, and many other minerals and used to manufacture a wide variety of materials, especially glass and concrete Surficial - of, relating to, or occurring on or near the surface of the earth Tuffaceous - comprising rocks made of compacted volcanic ash varying in size from fine sand to coarse gravel; also called tufa March 19, 2013 Mr. Andrew Hawkins, AIA Hawkins Architecture 7607 Eastmark Drive, Suite 200 College Station, Texas 77840 Re: Geotechnical Engineering Study - Addendum Proposed Veterans Park Maintenance Building Addition College Station, Texas Gessner Engineering Job No.: 12-0585 Dear Mr. Hawkins: This letter serves as an addendum to the geotechnical engineering study previously issued on December 4, 2012. Gessner Engineering understands that a new concrete drive is planned adjacent to the existing building, with anticipated heavy truck traffic. Pavement recommendations for the proposed parking lot are included in the following paragraphs. A concrete pavement system is recommended for areas with frequent or turning traffic. Asphalt pavement may be considered with the understanding that maintenance will be increased. Listed below are pavement component thicknesses, which may be used as a guide for concrete pavement systems at the site assuming that the pavement subgrade generally consists of the on-site natural clayey sand soils and is properly prepared as indicated in the sections below. We should note that these systems were derived based on general characterization of the subgrade. No specific testing (such as CBR's, resilient modulus, etc.) was performed for this project to evaluate the support characteristics of the subgrade. Concrete For the concrete parking lots, sidewalks and drives, frequent control joints should be used to direct shrinkage cracking with a maximum joint spacing as shown in the table below. It should be noted that the pavement thicknesses listed are minimum recommendations only and are not based on a pavement system design. Expansion joints shall be placed at anticipated stress points and dowels shall be placed across these joints. The concrete section may be reinforced and designed in accordance with ACI standard practices or may be designed as a jointed system in accordance with ACI 330R-08. Concrete shall be designed to exhibit a flexural strength (3-point loading) of at least 550 psi at 28 days. As an option, a 28-day compressive strength requirement of 4,000 psi may be utilized. Steel reinforcement for use in the rigid pavement system shall be Grade 60 or better. The concrete shall be placed on a six (6) inch stabilized subgrade. Reference the “Subgrade” Section below for specifications. Loading Concrete Thickness Control Joint Maximum Spacing Heavy Truck Traffic 6” 12’ Table 1: Rigid Pavement System Recommendations The minimum area of steel required for a reinforced section shall be computed by the drag formula: s f f whLCA 24 Where: A = area of steel reinforcement (in2/ft) L = distance between joints, ft Cf = Coefficient of subgrade resistance (use 1.5) w = density of concrete (lb/ft3) h = slab thickness (in) fs = allowable tensile stress in steel reinforcement (psi) Asphalt Below are the suggested minimum thicknesses of the elements in the pavement section: Layer Material Heavy Truck Traffic Material Thickness (inches) Asphaltic Concrete 2.0 Crushed Limestone Base 8.0 Chemically Stabilized Subgrade 6.0 Table 2: Flexible Pavement System The asphaltic concrete surface course should be plant mixed, hot laid Type D meeting the master specifications requirements in TxDOT Item 340. Hot Laid Type C asphalt mix should be considered for higher truck loadings where applicable. The mix should be designed for a stability to achieve a minimum service life of twenty-five years, and should be compacted to between 91 and 96 percent of the maximum theoretical density as determined by ASTM D 2041. Crushed Limestone Base Base material should be composed of crushed gravel meeting the requirements of TxDOT Item 247, Type B, Grade 2 at a minimum. The base should be compacted to a minimum of 98 percent of the maximum density as determined by the standard moisture/density relation (ASTM D 698) at -3 to +3 percent of optimum moisture content. Subgrade Gessner Engineering recommends the use of cement stabilizer for the treatment of sand subgrade to help enhance the support characteristics of the subgrade. The subgrade shall be treated to a depth resulting in six (6) inch thick subgrade. The subgrade should be treated with cement meeting the requirements of TxDOT 2003 Standard Specifications Item 275. Cement treatment shall be accomplished such that a uniform subgrade mix is obtained. Prior to the application of cement to the subgrade, the optimum percentage of cement to be added should be determined based on compressive strength tests on samples with varying percent cement and prepared in accordance with TEX-120-E. The required cement selected shall provide a minimum strength of 200 pounds per square inch. Cement shall be uniformly spread and mixed into the subgrade prior to the application of water. Stabilization shall be mixed and compacted in one lift and shall be completed the same day. General Fill If required, general fill used beneath the concrete pavement shall have a plasticity index between five (5) and thirty (30). Any fill beneath pavement shall be compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum density as determined by the modified moisture/density relation (ASTM D 1557) at -2 to +2 percent of the optimum moisture content. (As an alternate, compaction to at least 98 percent of the ASTM D-698 maximum dry density may be considered). It is important that proper perimeter drainage be provided so that infiltration of surface water from unpaved areas surrounding the pavement is minimized, or if this is not possible, curbs should extend through the base and into the subgrade. A crack sealant compatible to both asphalt and concrete should be provided at concrete-asphalt interfaces. We should note that post-construction subgrade movements and some cracking of asphaltic pavements is not uncommon for subgrade conditions such as those observed at this site. We trust that this letter is responsive to your project needs. Please contact us if you have any questions or if we can be of further assistance. Sincerely, GESSNER ENGINEERING, LLC F-7451 Morgan S. Lund, P.E., LEED® AP March 19, 2013 Mr. Andrew Hawkins, AIA Hawkins Architecture 7607 Eastmark Drive, Suite 200 College Station, Texas 77840 Re: Geotechnical Engineering Study - Addendum Proposed Veterans Park Maintenance Building Addition College Station, Texas Gessner Engineering Job No.: 12-0585 Dear Mr. Hawkins: This letter serves as an addendum to the geotechnical engineering study previously issued on December 4, 2012. Gessner Engineering understands that a new concrete drive is planned adjacent to the existing building, with anticipated heavy truck traffic. Pavement recommendations for the proposed parking lot are included in the following paragraphs. A concrete pavement system is recommended for areas with frequent or turning traffic. Asphalt pavement may be considered with the understanding that maintenance will be increased. Listed below are pavement component thicknesses, which may be used as a guide for concrete pavement systems at the site assuming that the pavement subgrade generally consists of the on-site natural clayey sand soils and is properly prepared as indicated in the sections below. We should note that these systems were derived based on general characterization of the subgrade. No specific testing (such as CBR's, resilient modulus, etc.) was performed for this project to evaluate the support characteristics of the subgrade. Concrete For the concrete parking lots, sidewalks and drives, frequent control joints should be used to direct shrinkage cracking with a maximum joint spacing as shown in the table below. It should be noted that the pavement thicknesses listed are minimum recommendations only and are not based on a pavement system design. Expansion joints shall be placed at anticipated stress points and dowels shall be placed across these joints. The concrete section may be reinforced and designed in accordance with ACI standard practices or may be designed as a jointed system in accordance with ACI 330R-08. Concrete shall be designed to exhibit a flexural strength (3-point loading) of at least 550 psi at 28 days. As an option, a 28-day compressive strength requirement of 4,000 psi may be utilized. Steel reinforcement for use in the rigid pavement system shall be Grade 60 or better. The concrete shall be placed on a six (6) inch stabilized subgrade. Reference the “Subgrade” Section below for specifications. Loading Concrete Thickness Control Joint Maximum Spacing Heavy Truck Traffic 6” 12’ Table 1: Rigid Pavement System Recommendations The minimum area of steel required for a reinforced section shall be computed by the drag formula: s f f whLCA 24 Where: A = area of steel reinforcement (in2/ft) L = distance between joints, ft Cf = Coefficient of subgrade resistance (use 1.5) w = density of concrete (lb/ft3) h = slab thickness (in) fs = allowable tensile stress in steel reinforcement (psi) Asphalt Below are the suggested minimum thicknesses of the elements in the pavement section: Layer Material Heavy Truck Traffic Material Thickness (inches) Asphaltic Concrete 2.0 Crushed Limestone Base 8.0 Chemically Stabilized Subgrade 6.0 Table 2: Flexible Pavement System The asphaltic concrete surface course should be plant mixed, hot laid Type D meeting the master specifications requirements in TxDOT Item 340. Hot Laid Type C asphalt mix should be considered for higher truck loadings where applicable. The mix should be designed for a stability to achieve a minimum service life of twenty-five years, and should be compacted to between 91 and 96 percent of the maximum theoretical density as determined by ASTM D 2041. Crushed Limestone Base Base material should be composed of crushed gravel meeting the requirements of TxDOT Item 247, Type B, Grade 2 at a minimum. The base should be compacted to a minimum of 98 percent of the maximum density as determined by the standard moisture/density relation (ASTM D 698) at -3 to +3 percent of optimum moisture content. Subgrade Gessner Engineering recommends the use of cement stabilizer for the treatment of sand subgrade to help enhance the support characteristics of the subgrade. The subgrade shall be treated to a depth resulting in six (6) inch thick subgrade. The subgrade should be treated with cement meeting the requirements of TxDOT 2003 Standard Specifications Item 275. Cement treatment shall be accomplished such that a uniform subgrade mix is obtained. Prior to the application of cement to the subgrade, the optimum percentage of cement to be added should be determined based on compressive strength tests on samples with varying percent cement and prepared in accordance with TEX-120-E. The required cement selected shall provide a minimum strength of 200 pounds per square inch. Cement shall be uniformly spread and mixed into the subgrade prior to the application of water. Stabilization shall be mixed and compacted in one lift and shall be completed the same day. General Fill If required, general fill used beneath the concrete pavement shall have a plasticity index between five (5) and thirty (30). Any fill beneath pavement shall be compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum density as determined by the modified moisture/density relation (ASTM D 1557) at -2 to +2 percent of the optimum moisture content. (As an alternate, compaction to at least 98 percent of the ASTM D-698 maximum dry density may be considered). It is important that proper perimeter drainage be provided so that infiltration of surface water from unpaved areas surrounding the pavement is minimized, or if this is not possible, curbs should extend through the base and into the subgrade. A crack sealant compatible to both asphalt and concrete should be provided at concrete-asphalt interfaces. We should note that post-construction subgrade movements and some cracking of asphaltic pavements is not uncommon for subgrade conditions such as those observed at this site. We trust that this letter is responsive to your project needs. Please contact us if you have any questions or if we can be of further assistance. Sincerely, GESSNER ENGINEERING, LLC F-7451 Morgan S. Lund, P.E., LEED® AP SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Access to site. 4. Coordination with occupants. 5. Work restrictions. 6. Specification and drawing conventions. B. Related Section: 1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Identification: City of College Station East District Maintenance Addition 1. Project Location: Veteran’s Park, 3100 Harvey Road, College Station, TX 77840 B. Owner: City of College Station, Parks & Recreation Department 1. Owner's Representative: Edward McDonald, CoCS Dept. Public Works: 979.764.3528 C. Architect: Hawkins Architecture, Inc. 979.693.3179 1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of the Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: 1. This is an addition to an existing maintenance building located within existing park space. a. Approximate Size: 3,000 Sq. Ft b. Code Class: c. Construction Overview: 1) Demolition: Metal wall panels & CMU end wall 2) Site Work: Site prep, grading, concrete, paving 3) Foundations: Cast in place concrete 4) Structure: Pre Engineered Metal Building 5) Exterior Walls: CMU masonry, Prefinished Metal Panels 6) Interior Partitions: Metal Stud, CMU 7) Floors: Concrete 8) Floor Finishes: Sealed concrete 9) Ceilings: Typical acoustical lay-in, solid gypsum board 10) Doors & Frames: Steel doors & frames, overhead doors 11) Millwork: Plastic laminate cabinetry 12) Wall Finishes: Painted Gypsum Board, Sealed Plywood  13) Electrical: Typical systems 14) Mechanical: Limited ventilation systems 15) Plumbing: Limited plumbing systems B. Type of Contract. 1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract as provided by the Owner. 1.4 ACCESS TO SITE A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section. B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Limits: Confine construction operations to areas as indicated on drawings. 2. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways, parking, loading areas, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. 1.5 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing building(s) during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated. 1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and approval of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Notify the Owner not less than 96 hours in advance of activities that will affect Owner's operations. 1.6 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. On-Site Work Hours:  1. Hours of operations shall be determined by the owner’s contract. C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect and Owner not less than seven<7> days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions. D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner. 1. Notify Architect and Owner not less than three <3> days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations. 1.7 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. 3. The Drawings and Specifications do not necessarily indicate or describe all Work required for completion of Project. 4. The Contract Documents describe the essential elements sufficiently to determine the scope of the Project. 5. Provide all items required for complete operating systems including items not necessarily shown in these Contract Documents, but that can be reasonably inferred as being required for a complete operating system. 6. The Drawings and Specifications indicate the basic quality of material and quality of construction required for the entire Project. B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on the Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on the Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations as scheduled on Drawings. 3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.  PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 011000  SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. It shall be the Owner's option to accept or reject any or all alternates upon completion of bidding. B. Items listed in this section are brief descriptions of alternate work indicated on the Bid Form and in the drawings and specifications. 1.02 SCOPE A. Bidders shall examine the drawings and refer to the various sections of the specifications in order to determine to what extent their work is affected by the Alternates. B. Deductions or additions for Alternates entered in the Bid Form shall be the entire cost of the Alternate work. All work necessary for a complete and workable installation of all items herein described or reasonably implied shall be included in the pricing of the Alternate. 1.03 ALTERNATES A. ALTERNATE NO. 1 - This Alternate shall establish the amount to be added to the Base Bid if the Project if the “work yard” area on the rear of the addition is to be paved with 1.5” of Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete (HMAC) paving. The specifications for this paving shall confirm to written specifications of the B/CS Unified Specifications. This shall be the additional cost for materials and labor to supply and install the paving. PART 2 - PRODCUTS Not Applicable PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Applicable END OF SECTION ALTERNATES 01230-1 THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PROPER DOUBLE SIDED PRINTING. ALTERNATES 01230-2 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 1 SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. B. Related Section: 1. Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit two copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use form provided in the Project Manual. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable specification section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project. h. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 2 i. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. j. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven <7>days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within fourteen <14>days of receipt of request, or seven <7> days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately upon discovery of need for change, but not later than Fifteen <15>days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied: a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. b. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. c. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. d. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. e. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. g. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 3 B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within Sixty <60>days after the Notice to Proceed. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied: a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 4 PREBID SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM DATE: ______________________________________ FAX NO:____________________________________ TO:_________________________________________ PROJECT:EAST DISTRICT MAINTENANCE ADDITION We hereby submit for your consideration the following product instead of the specified item for the above project. Section and Paragraph Specified Item ___________________ ___________________________________________________ Proposed Substitution: _________________________________________________________ Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, perfor- mance and test data adequate for evaluation of the request; applicable portions of the data are clearly identified. Attached data also includes a description of changes to the Contract Documents that the pro- posed substitution will require for its proper installation. The undersigned certifies that the following paragraphs, unless modified by attachments, are correct: 1. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on Drawings. 2. The undersigned will pay for changes to the building design, including engineering de- sign, detailing and construction costs caused by the requested substitution. 3. The proposed substitution will have no adverse affect on other trades, the construction schedule, or specified warranty requirements. 4. Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the proposed substitution. The undersigned further states that the function, appearance and quality of the proposed substi- tution are equivalent or superior to the specified item. Submitted By: Signature: _________________________________________________ Name:_____________________________________________________ Title: _____________________________________________________ Firm: _____________________________________________________ Address: _________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________ END OF SECTION 012500 SECTION 013100 - NOTIFICATION OF ARCHITECT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - NOTIFICATIONS 1.01 GENERAL A. In general, the Contractor shall notify the Architect at any time there is need of clarification or interpretation of the contract documents prior to proceeding with the affected portions of the work. B. Specifically, the Contractor shall notify the Architect 48 hours in advance of the following stages of construction: 1. Excavations for utilities 2. Placing of any concrete. 3. County inspections or City inspections. 4. Covering of any underground services. 5. Completion of roughing-in of plumbing and electrical work (prior to concealment). 6. Laying of masonry. 7. Covering of insulation. 8. Installation of glazing. 9. Installation of doors. 10. Installation of sealants. 11. Installation of millwork. 12. Painting and staining (each coat). 13. Installation of resilient flooring. 14. Installation of electrical fixtures. 15. Installation of any equipment specified in Division 11. 16. Installation of plumbing fixtures. 17. Installation of heating, ventilating, and air conditioning units. 18. Installation of any furnishings specified in Division 12. 19. Installation of ceramic tile. 20. Installation of wood flooring. 1.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer project meetings throughout progress of the work as required. B. Make physical arrangements for meetings at Project field office and preside at meetings, record minutes, and distribute copies within two days to Architect, participants, and those affected by decisions made at meetings. C. Attendance: Contractor's Job Superintendent and Project Manager, Project Owner's Representative, and Architect's Representatives, sub-contractors’ representatives as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Suggested Agenda: Review of work progress, status of progress schedule and adjustments thereto, delivery schedule, submittals, maintenance of quality standards, pending changes and substitutions, and other items affecting progress of Work. 1.03 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCES A. When required in individual specification section, conduct a pre-installation conference prior to commencing work of section. B. Required attendance: Contractor's Job Superintendent, Architect, and Subcontractor, Owner’s Rep. C. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures, and coordinate with related work. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Used)  END OF SECTION  SECTION 013110 - DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and other Division 1 Sections, govern work under this Section whether attached hereto or not. 1.02 SCOPE A. Indications on the drawings or in any section of the specifications or article or material, operation or method, requires that the Subcontractor shall provide each item or service of quality or subject to qualifications noted; and, the Subcontractor shall perform each operation prescribed according to conditions stated, providing therefore all necessary labor, equipment and incidentals to complete the work. B. Drawings and specifications do not indicate or describe ALL the work required to complete the project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Subcontractor and coordinated with the Architect. C. Under no circumstances shall bids be submitted or work be performed with uncertainty. Questions pertaining to work that does not appear to be sufficiently detailed or explained, or pertaining to the true meaning of any part of the Drawings or Specifications shall be referred to the Architect for clarifications. After execution of the contract, no allowances will be made in favor of the Subcontractor for failing to check dimensions and methods of construction on the drawings and at the site and reporting any discrepancies to the Architect. 1.03 ORGANIZATION A. The drawings and specifications have been organized by the use of cross references. Where references are shown on either the drawings or these specifications, they shall not be construed as complete. Also, the specifications are organized in sections as indicated, but such separations shall not be considered as the limits of the work required of any separate trade. The terms and conditions of such limitations are wholly between the Project Manager and his Subcontractors. 1.04 WORDING OF SPECIFICATIONS A. In order to emphasize the technical provisions and to obtain brevity, the phrases “The Contractor or Subcontractor shall furnish all labor and materials, etc.”, have at times been omitted from these specifications. Where the work “provide” appears, interpret it to mean “furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for a completed installation”. Where “you” is inferred, as for example, “set in place this item”, the inferred “you” means “the Contractor or Subcontractor shall”. B. All references to standard specifications or manufacturer’s installation specifications or recommendations shall mean the latest edition or revision thereof. The words “approved”, or “as approved”, “for approval”, “in an approved manner”, “Satisfactory”, and the like words and phrases shall be interpreted to mean the Architect’s approval in writing. 1.05 CORRELATION OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. Generally, the drawings indicate dimensions, positions, and kinds of materials and methods of construction while the Specifications indicate quality and application of materials. Work indicated on the drawings and not mentioned in the specifications, or vice versa, shall be furnished as though fully set forth in both. Work not particularly detailed, marked or specified shall be the same as similar work that is detailed, marked, or specified; refer to Article 1.2 of the General Conditions.   1.06 ERRORS A. Should an error appear in the Drawings or Specifications, or in the work done by others affecting this work, the Subcontractor shall notify the Architect at once and the Architect will issue instructions as to procedure. If the Subcontractor proceeds with the work so affected without instructions from the Architect, he (the Subcontractor) shall make good any resulting damage or defects. This includes typographical errors in the specifications and notational errors in the Drawings where doubtful of interpretation. 1.07 WORK PERFORMED BY OTHERS A. The General Contractor or Construction Project Manager is responsible for coordination of all work performed by others in connection with this project. END OF SECTION   SECTION 013120 - BUILDING CODES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and other Division 1 Sections, govern work under this Section whether attached hereto or not. 1.02 SCOPE A. All construction hereinafter shown and/or specified shall comply and be in accord with all local codes and ordinances having jurisdictions, and comply with the most current version of the International Building Code adopted by jurisdiction. B. Work shall comply with applicable requirements of the Handicapped Accessibility Act of Texas, as identified in Article 7, Article 601b., Vernon’s Texas Civil Statutes and with the Americans with Disabilities Act. 1.03 COOPERATION WITH BUILDING OFFICIALS A. Cooperate with applicable governmental officials and inspectors at all times. If such official or inspector deems special inspection necessary, provide assistance and facilities that will expedite his inspection. 1.04 DOCUMENTS REQUIRED ON SITE A. The Project Manager or Construction Site Superintendent shall provide a current copy of the Handicapped Accessibility Act of Texas as identified in Article 7, Article 601b., Vernon’s Texas Civil Statutes in the Field Office at all times, as well as the current International Building Codes relevant to the project’s jurisdictional location. 1.05 CONFLICTS A. Where a conflict exists between standards, specifications, codes, ordinances and drawings, the most stringent requirements shall apply. 1.06 CODES & JURISDICTIONS A. The project shall adhere to codes and requirements of the following jurisdictions: 1. City of College Station, Texas 2. County of Brazos, Texas 3. State of Texas. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION  THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PROPER DOUBLE SIDED PRINTING.  SECTION 013120 - BUILDING CODES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and other Division 1 Sections, govern work under this Section whether attached hereto or not. 1.02 SCOPE A. All construction hereinafter shown and/or specified shall comply and be in accord with all local codes and ordinances having jurisdictions, and comply with the most current version of the International Building Code adopted by jurisdiction. B. Work shall comply with applicable requirements of the Handicapped Accessibility Act of Texas, as identified in Article 7, Article 601b., Vernon’s Texas Civil Statutes and with the Americans with Disabilities Act. 1.03 COOPERATION WITH BUILDING OFFICIALS A. Cooperate with applicable governmental officials and inspectors at all times. If such official or inspector deems special inspection necessary, provide assistance and facilities that will expedite his inspection. 1.04 DOCUMENTS REQUIRED ON SITE A. The Project Manager or Construction Site Superintendent shall provide a current copy of the Handicapped Accessibility Act of Texas as identified in Article 7, Article 601b., Vernon’s Texas Civil Statutes in the Field Office at all times, as well as the current International Building Codes relevant to the project’s jurisdictional location. 1.05 CONFLICTS A. Where a conflict exists between standards, specifications, codes, ordinances and drawings, the most stringent requirements shall apply. 1.06 CODES & JURISDICTIONS A. The project shall adhere to codes and requirements of the following jurisdictions: 1. City of College Station, Texas 2. County of Brazos, Texas 3. State of Texas. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION  THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PROPER DOUBLE SIDED PRINTING.  SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Daily construction reports. 3. Field condition reports. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of the Project. C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. D. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format: 1. PDF electronic file. 2. TWO (2) paper copies. B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period. C. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, original duration, CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1 remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days. 1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float. 4. Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from the Notice to Proceed until most recent Application for Payment. D. Weekly Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals. E. Field Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontractors, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of Substantial Completion. 1. Contract substantial and final completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than [31] Thirty-one days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for any long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 2 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than [15] Fifteen days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's or Construction Manager's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than [30] Thirty days for punch list and final completion. C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract. 3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 4. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. c. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use of premises restrictions. f. Provisions for future construction. g. Seasonal variations. h. Environmental control. 5. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work. D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion. E. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues: 1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered RFIs. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals. F. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is Fourteen [14] or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. G. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. 1. Utilize any program common to the industry or specific software as requested by the owner. 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART) A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-chart-type, Contractor's construction schedule within [21] Twenty-one days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 3 B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. 1. For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in [20%] Twenty percent increments within time bar. 2.3 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site and submit to Architect/Owner’s Rep within 24 hours.: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events. 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized. Logs shall be kept on site for the duration of the project and available for review by Architect/Owner’s Rep. B. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 4 3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Construction Manager, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 5 THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PROPER DOUBLE SIDED PRINTING. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 6 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 6 THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PROPER DOUBLE SIDED PRINTING. PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - 1 SECTION 013233 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Preconstruction photographs. 2. Periodic construction photographs. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation as Project Record Documents at Project closeout. 1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph. Indicate elevation or story of construction. Include same information as corresponding photographic documentation. B. Digital Photographs: Submit image files within three (3)days of taking photographs. 1. Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 7 megapixels. 2. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file metadata tag: a. Name of Project. b. Date photograph was taken. c. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, with minimum size of 7 megapixels. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the Work. PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - 2 1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic location. 2. It is suggested that photos be taken from same/similar location for each session. B. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software. 1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image. C. Preconstruction Photographs: Before commencement of excavation, commencement of demolition and starting construction, take photographs of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points, as directed by Architect or Owner. 1. Take Twenty (20) photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the Work. 2. Take Twenty (20) photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to accurately record physical conditions at start of construction. D. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take minimum Twenty (20)photographs biweekly,with timing each month adjusted to coincide with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. E. Additional Photographs: 1. In emergency situations, take additional photographs as required or deemed necessary. 2. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Special events planned at Project site. b. Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or losses. c. Events or conditions on site warrant documentation for record. d. Photographs to be taken at fabrication locations away from Project site. These photographs are not subject to unit prices or unit-cost allowances. e. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the Work. f. Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance. END OF SECTION 013233 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1 SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 3. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or modifications to submittals noted by the Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1.4 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 2 a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow Fourteen (14)days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow Fourteen (14)days for review of each resubmittal. D. Identification and Information: Place a permanent label or title block on each paper copy submittal item for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of subcontractor. f. Name of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal Number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier if required. i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section j. Drawing number and detail references, as applicable. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate l. Other necessary identification. E. Identification and Information: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file.. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 4. Include the following information on an inserted cover sheet: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of subcontractor. f. Name of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 3 j. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. k. Related physical samples submitted directly. l. Other necessary identification. F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by the Architect. G. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. H. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. I. Transmittal: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than Prime Contractor. 1. Transmittal Form: Use standard form for each submittal. 2. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal. J. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. K. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. L. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: 1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Project Web site specifically established for Project. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 2. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 4 3. Action Submittals: Submit number required by Contractor’s use of paper copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return all paper copies. 4. Informational Submittals: Submit one (1)paper copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 5. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." 6. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 7. Test and inspection Report Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. 4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Operational range diagrams. c. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings. 5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. a. PDF electronic file. b.OR Three (3)paper copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return three (3)copies. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal based upon Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 5 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 42 inches. 3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. b.OR three (3)opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Architect will return three copies. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. 3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit one (1)full set of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. E. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." F. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures." G. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures." H. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. 1. Submit subcontract list in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. b.OR Two (2)paper copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return one (1)copy. I. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 6 J. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified. K. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on American Welding Society (AWS) forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. L. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. M. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. N. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. O. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. P. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. Q. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. R. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. S. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." T. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. U. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. V. Field Test Reports: Submit reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. W. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 7 X. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. 2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit -signed PDF electronic file and three (3)paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Project Closeout and Maintenance/Material Submittals: Refer to requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action(s). SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 8 C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Incomplete submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 013300 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1 SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Items noted as (*Optional) shall not be required on this project as part of the bidding. If the contractor deems them to be necessary, they shall be set forth and noted by additional line items of bid. C. Related Section: 1. Division 01 Section "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions. 1.2 USE CHARGES A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the Texas Accessibility Standards. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-) thick, galvanized steel, chain- link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8- inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top rails. . Provide galvanized steel bases for supporting posts and 1-5/8” OD bottom rails for portable chain-link fencing. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Unless noted specifically in the owner contract or within bidding documents, these temporary items are at the discretion of the contractor. Projects may not warrant ALL items. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 2 B.(Optional)Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. 1. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. C.(Optional)Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. This shall only be required to store weather sensitive items on site if intended by the Contractor. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. 1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 1. Connect temporary sewers as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. G. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner. 1. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner. H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install telephone line(s) for each field office as required by Owner. 1. Provide additional telephone lines for facsimile machine in field office: 2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor's home office. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 3 d. Architect's office. e. Engineers' offices. f. Owner's office. g. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. 3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office. J. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a computer in the primary field office adequate for use by Contractor, Architect or Owner to access project electronic documents and maintain electronic communications. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet (9 m)of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241. 2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas as indicated on Drawings. 1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust. C. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations. 1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and paved areas. 2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas according to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing. 4. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course pavement before installation of final course according to Division 32 Section "Asphalt Paving." D. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. E. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel. F. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. G. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs, if any, as indicated on Drawings. 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. H. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements. I. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 4 J. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. K. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings L. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. M. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. N. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations or as indicated on Drawings. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. O. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day. P. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. Q. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. R. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate temporary enclosures. S. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner and tenants from fumes and noise. 1. Where fire-resistance-rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required by authorities having jurisdiction, construct partitions according to the rated assemblies. 2. Insulate partitions to control noise transmission to occupied areas. 3. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security locks where openings are required. 4. Protect air-handling equipment. 5. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition. T. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 3.4 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL A. Contractor's Moisture Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction. B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect materials from water damage and keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 5 C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building. 2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Discard or replace water-damaged and wet material. 4. Discard, replace or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 5. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes. D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows: 1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions. 2. Remove materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours. 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 6 THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PROPER DOUBLE SIDED PRINTING. TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 015639 - 1 SECTION 015639 - TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes general protection and pruning of existing trees and plants that are affected by execution of the Work, whether temporary or permanent construction. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs, or other vegetation to be protected during construction, and defined by a circle concentric with each tree with a radius 1.5 times the diameter of the drip line unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Tree Pruning Schedule: Written schedule detailing scope and extent of pruning of trees to remain that interfere with or are affected by construction. C. Certification: From arborist, certifying that trees indicated to remain have been protected during construction according to recognized standards and that trees were promptly and properly treated and repaired when damaged. D. Maintenance Recommendations: From arborist, for care and protection of trees affected by construction during and after completing the Work. E. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings indicated to remain, which establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by construction activities. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones: 1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Foot traffic. 4. Erection of sheds or structures. 5. Impoundment of water. 6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. 7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise indicated. B. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust toward protection zones. C. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones and organic mulch. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated top layer of the soil profile or manufactured topsoil; containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter; and free of weeds, roots, and toxic and other nonsoil materials. B. Topsoil: Stockpiled topsoil from location shown on Drawings. TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 015639 - 2 C. Organic Mulch: Shredded hardwood, Ground or shredded bark or Wood and bark chips, free from deleterious materials. D. Protection-Zone Fencing: Fencing fixed in position and meeting one of the following requirements. 1. Chain-Link Protection-Zone Fencing: Galvanized-steel fencing fabricated from minimum 2-inch (50-mm) opening, 0.148-inch- (3.76-mm-) diameter wire chain-link fabric; with pipe posts, minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts, and 2-7/8- inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts; with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top rails and 0.177-inch- (4.5-mm-) diameter bottom tension wire; with tie wires, hog ring ties, and other accessories for a complete fence system. 2. Plywood Protection-Zone Fencing: Plywood framed with four 2-by-4-inch (50-by- 100-mm) rails, with 4-by-4-inch (100-by-100-mm) preservative-treated wood posts spaced not more than 8 feet (2.4 m) apart. 3. Wood Protection-Zone Fencing: Constructed of two 2-by-4-inch (50-by-100-mm) horizontal rails, with 4-by-4-inch (100-by-100-mm) preservative-treated wood posts spaced not more than 8 feet (2.4 m) apart, and lower rail set halfway between top rail and ground. 4. Plastic Protection-Zone Fencing: Plastic construction fencing constructed of high- density extruded and stretched polyethylene fabric with 2-inch (50-mm) maximum opening in pattern and supported by tubular or T-shape galvanized- steel posts spaced not more than 8 feet (2.4 m) apart. High-visibility orange color, nonfading. 5. Height of Fencing: 4 feet in areas of low traffic and 6 feet in areas of high traffic. Gates: Swing access gates matching material and appearance of fencing, to allow for maintenance activities within protection zones. E. Protection-Zone Signage: Shop-fabricated, rigid plastic or metal sheet with attachment holes prepunched and reinforced; legibly printed with nonfading lettering. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Examine the site to verify that temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures are in place. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones. B. Protect tree root systems from damage caused by runoff or spillage of noxious materials while mixing, placing, or storing construction materials. Protect root systems from ponding, eroding, or excessive wetting caused by dewatering operations. C. Protection Zones: Mulch areas inside protection zones and other areas indicated with 4-inch (100-mm) average thickness of organic mulch. Do not place mulch within 6 inches (150 mm) of tree trunks. 3.2 PROTECTION ZONES A. Protection-Zone Fencing: Install protection-zone fencing along edges of protection zones in a manner that will prevent people from easily entering protected area except by entrance gates. 1. Chain-Link Fencing: Install to comply with ASTM F 567 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Posts: Set or drive posts into ground one-third the total height of the fence without concrete footings. Where a post is located on existing paving or concrete to remain, provide appropriate means of post support acceptable to Architect. 3. Access Gates: Install where necessary for access or required by owner. TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 015639 - 3 B. Protection-Zone Signage: Install protection-zone signage in visibly prominent locations in a manner approved by Architect. C. Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. D. Maintain protection-zone fencing and signage in good condition as acceptable to Architect and remove when construction operations are complete and equipment has been removed from the site. 3.3 EXCAVATION A. General: Excavate at edge of protection zones and for trenches indicated within protection zones according to requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." B. Trenching near Trees: Where utility trenches are required within protection zones, hand excavate under or around tree roots or tunnel under the roots by drilling, auger boring, or pipe jacking. Do not cut main lateral tree roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with installation of utilities. Cut roots as required for root pruning. C. Do not allow exposed roots to dry out before placing permanent backfill. 3.4 ROOT PRUNING A. Prune roots that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Prune roots as follows: 1. Cut roots manually by digging a trench and cutting exposed roots with sharp pruning instruments; do not break, tear, chop, or slant the cuts. Do not use a backhoe or other equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots. 2. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently covered with soil. 3. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. 4. Backfill as soon as possible according to requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." B. Root Pruning at Edge of Protection Zone: Prune roots by cleanly cutting all roots to the depth of the required excavation. C. Root Pruning within Protection Zone: Clear and excavate by hand to the depth of the required excavation to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible. 3.5 CROWN PRUNING A. Prune branches that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Prune branches as follows: 1. Prune trees to remain to compensate for root loss caused by damaging or cutting root system. Provide subsequent maintenance during Contract period as recommended by arborist. 2. Cut branches with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop. 3. Do not apply pruning paint to wounds. B. Chip removed branches and spread over areas on site or dispose of off-site. 3.6 REGRADING A. Lowering Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing grade around trees, slope grade beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone. B. Raising Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated above existing grade around trees, slope grade beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone. TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 015639 - 4 C. Minor Fill within Protection Zone: Where existing grade is 2 inches (50 mm) or less below elevation of finish grade, fill with topsoil. Place topsoil in a single uncompacted layer and hand grade to required finish elevations. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspections: Engage a qualified arborist to direct plant-protection measures in the vicinity of trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain and to prepare inspection reports. 3.8 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT A. General: Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. 1. Have arborist perform the root cutting, branch pruning, and damage repair of trees and shrubs. 2. Treat damaged trunks, limbs, and roots according to arborist's written instructions. 3. Perform repairs within 24 hours. 4. Replace vegetation that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by Architect. 3.9 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove excess excavated material, displaced trees, trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 015639 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1 SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. B. Related Section: 1. Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within [15] Fifteen days of receipt of request, or [7] Seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 2 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed. 3. Refer to Divisions 02 through 49. Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 3 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 3. Products: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered, unless otherwise indicated or objectionable to owner. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 4. Manufacturers: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered, unless otherwise indicated or objectionable to the owner. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. 5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product. D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 4 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 016000 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1 SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 2. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for project record documents of the Work in those Sections. 1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit one (1)set of marked-up record prints. a. Final Submittal: Submit one (1) paper copy set or PDF electronic files of marked-up record prints. Print each Drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy (1) or annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. C. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy (1) or annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. c. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Utilize personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints. 3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows: 1. Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the original Contract Drawings. 2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment functions enabled. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 2 3. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 4. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution. 5. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for use in recording information. C. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file. 4. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Contractor. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 3. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file, paper copy or scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked up paper copy of Specifications. 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file, paper copy, or scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked up paper copy of Product Data. 2.4 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and modifications to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 017839 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1 SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician. B. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins. C. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. 1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items: a. None at this time. C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 2 1.8 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. D. Perform a survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations. If required, retain and engineer to provide assessment of conditions. E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs. 1. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation." 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. 1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Division 01 Section "Summary." B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 3 f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. C. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. B. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. C. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 4 3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an approved landfill. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 024119 SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. D. Formwork Shop Drawings: Detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork. E. Welding certificates. F. Material certificates. G. Material test reports. H. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. B. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5. 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." C. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. C. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet. D. Galvanized-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from galvanized-steel wire into flat sheets. E. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C. b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, graded. 1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. 2.4 ADMIXTURES A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide any necessary admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. 2.5 WATERSTOPS A. Flexible Rubber Waterstops: CE CRD-C 513, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes. Only provide as indicated on structural drawings. Those indicated on structural drawings override. 2.6 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: Polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils (0.25 mm) thick. 2.7 CURING MATERIALS A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry. B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. C. Water: Potable. 2.8 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, Asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber. 2.9 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent. C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3500 psi for drives unless noted otherwise on civil drawings. 3000 psi for all other concrete unless noted otherwise on drawings at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 4. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size. 5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 2 2.10 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.11 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Do not chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 3.3 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Lap joints 12 inches (300 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. 3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. 3.5 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect or Structural Engineer. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one- fourth of concrete thickness as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. E. Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated according to manufacturer's written instructions. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 3 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. B. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. C. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1. D. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301. 3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, or to receive a rubbed finish. C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where indicated: 1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.8 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch (6 mm) in one direction. 1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and to receive concrete floor toppings or bonded cementitious floor finishes. C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Re-straighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and re-straightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated to receive trowel finish. D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to all surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 3/16 inch (4.8 mm). E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces indicated or where exposed to elements and foot traffic. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. 1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 4 F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. 4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.10 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. END OF SECTION 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 5 THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PROPER DOUBLE SIDED PRINTING. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 6 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 6 THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PROPER DOUBLE SIDED PRINTING. SECTION 042200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete masonry units (CMU's). 2. Steel reinforcing bars. 3. Masonry-cell insulation. 1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. 1. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength. 2. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength. 3. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 780 for compressive strength. 4. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 1019. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel. Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show elevations of reinforced walls. C. Samples: For each type and color of exposed masonry unit and colored mortar. D. Material Certificates: For each type and size of product indicated. For masonry units include data on material properties. E. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content. 2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. B. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for mockups. 1. Build sample panels for typical interior wall in sizes approximately 60 inches long by 48 inches high by full thickness. If wall materials require mock up to be higher than 48” to sample full wall qualities, architect shall notify during submittal process. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 1 B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work. B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for fire- resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by equivalent masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. B. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with liquid polymeric, integral water repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength where indicated. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ACM Chemistries, Inc.; RainBloc. b. BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Plus. c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block. C. CMUs: ASTM C 90. 1. Density Classification: Normal weight unless otherwise indicated. D. Decorative CMUs: ASTM C 90. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Featherlite Corporation b. Jewel Concrete Products c. TXI Concrete Products d. Eagle Lake Concrete Products e. Headwaters Construction Materials 2. Density Classification: Normal weight 3. Pattern and Texture: a. Standard pattern, split-face finish. Match Existing Building. 2.3 MASONRY LINTELS A. General: Provide one of the following: B. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUs with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. 2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients. D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. For joints less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve. 2. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. 3. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color. E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 2 F. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ACM Chemistries, Inc.; RainBloc for Mortar. b. BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Mortar Admixture. c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block Mortar Admixture. G. Water: Potable. 2.5 REINFORCEMENT A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60 (Grade 420). B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M. 1. Interior Walls: Mill or Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.187-inch (4.76-mm) diameter. 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.187-inch (4.76-mm) diameter. 2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated. 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B- 2 coating. 2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating. 3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch- (6.35-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. 2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch (25 mm) of masonry face, made from 0.25-inch- (6.35-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. C. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 1. Connector Section: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and attached to tie section; formed from 0.060-inch- (1.52-mm-) thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication. 2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch (25 mm) of masonry face, made from 0.187-inch- (4.76-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. 3. Corrugated Metal Ties: Metal strips not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide with corrugations having a wavelength of 0.3 to 0.5 inch (7.6 to 12.7 mm) and an amplitude of 0.06 to 0.10 inch (1.5 to 2.5 mm) made from 0.060-inch- (1.52-mm-) thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication with dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and sized to extend to within 1 inch (25 mm) of masonry face. D. Partition Top anchors: 0.105-inch- (2.66-mm-) thick metal plate with 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter metal rod 6 inches (152 mm) long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. E. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) thick by 24 inches (610 mm) long, with ends turned up 2 inches (51 mm) or with cross pins unless otherwise indicated. 1. Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M. 2.7 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Flexible Flashing: Use the following unless otherwise indicated: CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 3 1. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.030 inch (0.76 mm). a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Peel-N-Seal. 2) Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing. 3) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Dur-O-Barrier Thru-Wall Flashing. 4) Fiberweb, Clark Hammerbeam Corp.; Aquaflash 500. 5) Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing. 6) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 82 Rubberized-Asphalt Thru-Wall Flashing. 7) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Textroflash. 8) W. R. Meadows, Inc.; Air-Shield Thru-Wall Flashing. 9) Polyguard Products, Inc.; Polyguard 300. 10) Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Sando-Seal. 11) Williams Products, Inc.; Everlastic MF-40. 12) Others as approved by Architect B. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." C. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Provide items as required for complete installation. Accessories may or may not be indicated on drawings, but shall be provided when necessary to complete masonry systems. B. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; formulated from neoprene, urethane or PVC. C. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. D. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). 2.9 MASONRY-CELL INSULATION A. Loose-Granular Fill Insulation: Perlite complying with ASTM C 549, Type II (surface treated for water repellency and limited moisture absorption) or Type IV (surface treated for water repellency and to limit dust generation). 2.10 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated. B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated. 1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. 3. For mortar parge coats, use Type S. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 4 4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N. 5. For interior non-load-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N. D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product 1. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units: a. Decorative CMUs. E. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1. 3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (203 to 279 mm) as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TOLERANCES A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch (12 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). 2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch (12 mm). 3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) in a story height or 1/2 inch (12 mm) total. B. Lines and Levels: 1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. C. Joints: 1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm). 2. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch (9 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3.2 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 5 C. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. E. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. F. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated. NOTE: Structural drawings dictate and overrule. 3.3 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows: 1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted. B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated. D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 MASONRY-CELL INSULATION A. Install the following as indicated on drawings unless otherwise noted. B. Pour granular insulation into cavities to fill void spaces. Maintain inspection ports to show presence of insulation at extremities of each pour area. Close the ports after filling has been confirmed. Limit the fall of insulation to one story high, but not more than 20 feet (6 m). 3.5 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). 1. Space reinforcement as indicated on drawings. 2. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement. B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units. D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units. 3.6 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete where masonry abuts or faces structural steel or concrete to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch (25 mm) wide between masonry and structural steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically and 36 inches (915 mm) o.c. horizontally. 3.7 FLASHING A. General: Install embedded flashing in masonry at lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated: CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 6 1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. At lintels, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches (150 mm) at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form end dams. 3. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination. 3.8 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during construction. B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches (1520 mm). 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. B. Inspections: Special inspections according to the "International Building Code as required by local authority having jurisdiction. These may include: ." 1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared mortar. 2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement. 3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout. 3.10 PARGING A. Parge exterior faces of below-grade masonry walls, where indicated, in 2 uniform coats to a total thickness of 3/4 inch (19 mm). B. Use a steel-trowel finish to produce a smooth, flat, dense surface. Form a wash at top of parging and a cove at bottom. C. Damp-cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect parging until cured. 3.11 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. 2. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 7 END OF SECTION 042200 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 8 THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PROPER DOUBLE SIDED PRINTING CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 9 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 8 THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PROPER DOUBLE SIDED PRINTING ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 1 SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Shear wall panels. 2. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 3. Wood blocking and nailers. 4. Wood furring 5. Plywood backing panels. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review. B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Engineered wood products. 4. Shear panels. 5. Power-driven fasteners. 6. Powder-actuated fasteners. 7. Expansion anchors. 8. Metal framing anchors. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL 1. Dimension lumber framing. 2. Miscellaneous lumber. B. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. C. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 2 B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Application: Treat all rough carpentry indicated.on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls. 4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches (460 mm) above the ground in crawlspaces or unexcavated areas. 5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade. 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test- response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire- retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. 2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. E. Application: Treat all rough carpentry items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Framing for raised platforms. 2. Framing for stages. 3. Concealed blocking. 4. Plywood backing panels. 2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A. Framing Other Than Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: No. 2 grade. 1. Application: Framing other than interior partitions . 2. Species: a. Southern pine; SPIB. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Cants. 5. Furring. 6. Grounds. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 3 B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species. C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and the following species and grades: 1. Mixed southern pine; No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, AC in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal thickness. 2.7 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or Type 304 stainless steel. B. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. C. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. 2.8 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. 2. KC Metals Products, Inc. 3. Phoenix Metal Products, Inc. 4. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. 5. USP Structural Connectors. C. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated or of basis-of-design products. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation. 1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated. E. Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; structural steel (SS), high-strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G185 (Z550) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick. 1. Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. B. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch (0.6 mm). PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 4 B. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view. C. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole. D. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. E. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. F. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. G. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 3.2 PROTECTION A. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes sufficiently wet that moisture content exceeds that specified, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. END OF SECTION 061000 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED CABINETS 064116 -1 SECTION 064116 - PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Shop fabrication of all millwork items as indicated in the drawings. B. Installation provided under Section 06101. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 06101 - Carpentry, Rough and Finish (installation) B. Section 07900 – Building Sealants C. Section 09901 - Painting and Staining 1.3 REFERENCES A. Architectural Woodwork Institute 1. AWI 300-4 B. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association 1. NEMA LD 3-1975 C. Southern Pine Association 1. SPA, Grading Rules D. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau 1. WCLIB, Grading Rules E. American Plywood Association 1. APA, Grading Rules F. Hardwood Plywood Association 1. HPA, Grading Rules G. Western Wood Products Association 1. WWPA, Grading Rules 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Showing complete construction detail, kinds of material, size of members and methods of securing members together and to adjacent work shall be submitted to the Architect in quadruplicate before proceeding with the work. 2. Within four weeks of award of contract, submit representative samples of natural finish materials for Architect's approval. 1.5 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Refer to Section 01630 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Particle Board and Plywood 1. Roddis Plywood Corporation 2. United States Plywood Corp. 3. Georgia Pacific 4. Weyerhauser B. Plastic Laminate 1. General Electric (Textolite) 2. Formica Corp. (Formica) 3. Westinghouse Electric Corp. (Micarta) 4. Ralph Wilson Plastics (Wilsonart) 5. Enjay Fibers & Laminates Co. (Nevamar) PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED CABINETS 064116 -2 C. Finish Hardware 1. Engineered Products Company 2. Stanley 3. Knape & Vogt 4. Julius Blum 5. Trimco 2.2 MATERIALS A. General 1. Provide best quality of its respective grades and kinds. Grades specified conform to the most recent grading rules of the Southern Pine Association, the West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau, American Plywood Association, Hardwood Plywood Association or Western Wood Products Association, under whose rules the lumber is produced. B. Scheduled Items 1. Miscellaneous millwork items as indicated in the drawings. C. Lumber 1. Kiln-dried to 10% to 12% moisture content which shall be maintained during the fabrication of millwork. D. Interior Trim and Moldings 1. Painted: Custom grade Birch, conforming to AWI quality standard 300-4 for paint finish. E. Grades of Plywood 1. General: All items indicated as plywood in the drawings and specifications shall be wood veneer core or lumber core. 2. N Grade oak plywood at exposed portions of (trophy case) 3. B-C Grade Douglas Fir: Used for plastic laminating cores. F. Particle Board 1. Three ply completely filled interior particle board for use under plastic laminated surfaces, thickness as indicated on the drawings. G. Plastic Laminate Surfacing 1. Comply with NEMA Standard GP50 General Purpose Grade .050 inch thick, high pressure laminated plastic which equals or exceeds performance standards set by National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA LD 3-1975) for class 1 high pressure decorative laminates as to resistance to wear, burns, stains, moisture and water, and dimensional change. H. Cabinet Hardware Description Manufacturer Model Quantity Door and drawer pull Trimco 462 (4") One per door or drawer Drawer slides Knape and Vogt 1428 One set per drawer Door hinges Stanley HT1592 x 626 Two per door up to 48 inches in height; three per door over 48 inches in height Door catches Knape and Vogt 916 One per door Adjustable shelf standards and brackets Knape and Vogt 255 and 256 Two standards per shelf end; one additional standard at center of shelves over 36" in width Adjustable shelf standards and brackets (trophy cases) Knape and Vogt 87 and 187 Three per glass shelf Cabinet Locks Timberline CB-185 with LP-100 One lock at each pair of wardrobe cabinet doors. Provide one interior latch at door without lock. PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED CABINETS 064116 -3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Fastening of Exposed Members 1. Do not use exposed nails. 2. All exposed members are to be glued, using either pressure or electrical wood welder. 3. All traces of excess glue shall be removed. B. Fastening of Tops 1. Tops shall be fastened to sub or web frames with concealed clips, screws, glue blocks or similar hidden fastenings. C. Edge Treatment 1. Visible edges of plywood shall be banded with lumber edgings. 2. Species shall match the face veneers of plywood, but may be of any species on particle board. 3. Visible edges shall be eased by sanding. D. Finish Hardware 1. This Contractor shall install finish hardware on millwork as specified herein or indicated on the drawings as Millwork. E. Verify lengths of counter tops, splashes, continuous shelving, and bases. All tops or shelving 8'-0" or less to be one piece. END OF SECTION PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED CABINETS 064116 -4 THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PROPER DOUBLE SIDED PRINTING THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 1 SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Foam-plastic board insulation. 2. Glass-fiber blanket insulation. 3. Loose-fill insulation. 4. Vapor retarders. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product test reports. C. Research/evaluation reports. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, with maximum flame-spread and smoke- developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). c. Owens Corning. d. Pactiv Building Products. 2. Type IV, 25 psi (173 kPa) or Type VI, 40 psi (276 kPa). 2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Guardian Building Products, Inc. 3. Johns Manville. 4. Knauf Insulation. 5. Owens Corning. B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. Use for interior locations and as indicated on drawings. C. Reinforced-Foil-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (reflective faced), Class A (faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil scrim, foil-scrim kraft, or foil-scrim polyethylene. Use for exterior wall applications and where noted on drawings. 2.3 LOOSE-FILL INSULATION A. Cellulosic-Fiber Loose-Fill Insulation: ASTM C 739, chemically treated for flame-resistance, processing, and handling characteristics. B. Glass-Fiber Loose-Fill Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type I for pneumatic application or Type II for poured application; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84. THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 2 2.4 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils (0.15 mm) thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm (7.5 ng/Pa x s x sq. m). B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time. C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION A. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. both ways on inside face, and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions. Press units firmly against inside substrates. 1. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece wall ties designed for this purpose and specified in Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry." 3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Seal joints between units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. C. Glass-Fiber or Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm)clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. 4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm), support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. 5. For wood-framed construction, install blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as follows: a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material is installed over it. 6. Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder facings, and seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation. a. Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed as indicated on Drawings. b. Interior Walls: Set units with facing placed as indicated on Drawings. THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 3 D. Loose-Fill Insulation: Apply according to ASTM C 1015 and manufacturer's written instructions. Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as indicated, lightly settle to uniform density, but do not compact excessively. 1. For cellulosic-fiber loose-fill insulation, comply with CIMA's Bulletin #2, "Standard Practice for Installing Cellulose Insulation." E. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials: 1. Loose-Fill Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft.(40 kg/cu. m). 2. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS A. Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on Drawings. Extend vapor retarders to extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarders to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation. B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs. 1. Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches (406 mm)o.c. 2. Before installing vapor retarders, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal framing including runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and window openings. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Seal butt joints with vapor-retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates. 3. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor-retarder fasteners as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer. C. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarders. D. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders. END OF SECTION 072100 THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 4 THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PROPER DOUBLE SIDED PRINTING. WEATHER BARRIERS 072500 - 1 SECTION 072500 - WEATHER BARRIERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Building wrap. 2. Flexible flashing. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For water-resistive barrier and flexible flashing, from ICC-ES. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER A. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air barrier; with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Styrofoam Weathermate Plus Brand Housewrap. b. DuPont (E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company); Tyvek CommercialWrap. c. Ludlow Coated Products; Barricade Building Wrap. d. Pactiv, Inc.; GreenGuard Classic Wrap Ultra Wrap. e. Raven Industries Inc.; Fortress Pro Weather Protective Barrier. f. Reemay, Inc.; Typar HouseWrap. 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: Not less than 50 Fifty g through 1 sq. m of surface in 24 hours per ASTM E 96/E 96M, Desiccant Method (Procedure A). B. Building-Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building-wrap manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive butyl rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high- density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch (0.6 mm). 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. DuPont (E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company); DuPont Flashing Tape. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Vycor Butyl Self Adhered Flashing. c. Protecto Wrap Company; BT-25 XL. d. Raven Industries Inc.; Fortress Flashshield. e. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Wind-o-wrap. f. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing. g. Fiberweb, Clark Hammerbeam Corp.; Aquaflash 500. h. Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Fortiflash 25. i. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Vycor Plus Self- Adhered Flashing. j. MFM Building Products Corp.; Window Wrap. k. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Polyguard JT-20 Tape. l. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Presto-Seal. WEATHER BARRIERS 072500 - 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER INSTALLATION A. Cover sheathing with water-resistive barrier as follows: 1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch (13 mm) on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion- or control-joint locations. 2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch (100-mm) overlap unless otherwise indicated. B. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape. 2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape. 3.2 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches (100 mm) except that at flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width. 2. Lap flashing over water-resistive barrier at bottom and sides of openings. 3. Lap water-resistive barrier over flashing at heads of openings. END OF SECTION 072500 METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - 1 SECTION 074113 - METAL ROOF PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standing-seam metal roof panels. 2. Metal soffit panels. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Roofing" for custom-fabricated and on-site, roll-formed sheet metal roofing. 2. Section 074213 – METAL WALL PANELS 3. Section 133419 – METAL BUIDLING SYSTEMS 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 2140. B. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind- uplift-resistance class indicated. 1. Uplift Rating: UL 90. 2. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90. 3. Hail Resistance: MH. C. Structural Performance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592: 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind pressures: a. Uniform pressure of 20 lbf/sq. ft. (957 Pa), acting inward or outward. 2. Deflection Limits: Metal roof panel assemblies shall withstand wind and snow loads with vertical deflections no greater than 1/180 of the span. D. Energy Performance: Provide roof panels that are listed on the U.S. Department of Energy's ENERGY STAR Roof Products Qualified Product List for low-slope roof products. E. Energy Performance: Provide roof panels with initial solar reflectance not less than 0.70 and emissivity not less than 0.75 when tested according to CRRC-1. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal roof panels; details of edge conditions, side-seam and endlap joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory- and field- assembled work. C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal roof panel assembly indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data and calculations signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. E. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, based on input from installers of the items involved. F. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that roof panels comply with energy performance requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. 1. Submit evidence of meeting performance requirements. G. Product test reports. H. Field quality-control reports. I. Maintenance data. J. Warranties: Samples of special warranties. METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - 2 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide metal roof panels identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal roof panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal roof panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PANEL MATERIALS A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; structural quality. 2. Surface: Smooth, flat (to match Existing roof) finish. 3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a. 3-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. 4. Concealed Finish: Manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish. B. Panel Sealants: 1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing; 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick. 2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; as recommended in writing by metal roof panel manufacturer. 3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311. 2.2 FIELD-INSTALLED THERMAL INSULATION A. Refer to Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation." B. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils (0.15 mm) thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm (7.5 ng/Pa x s x sq. m). C. Metal Building Insulation: ASTM C 991, Type II, glass-fiber-blanket insulation; 0.5-lb/cu. ft. (8- kg/cu. m) density; 2-inch- (50-mm-) wide, continuous, vapor-tight edge tabs; and with a flame- spread index of 25 or less. 1. Vapor-Retarder Facing: ASTM C 1136, with permeance not greater than 0.02 perm (1.15 ng/Pa x s x sq. m) when tested according to ASTM E 96, Desiccant Method: a. Composition: Vinyl faced, scrim reinforced, and foil backing. 2. Insulation Retainer Strips: 0.019-inch- (0.48-mm-) thick, formed, galvanized-steel or PVC retainer clips colored to match insulation facing. 3. Thermal Spacer Blocks: Fabricated from extruded polystyrene, 1 inch (25 mm) thick. METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - 3 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING A. Miscellaneous Metal Framing, General: ASTM C 645, cold-formed metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120) hot-dip galvanized or coating with equivalent corrosion resistance unless otherwise indicated. B. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: 1. Nominal Thickness: 0.040 inch (1.02 mm) unless. 2. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) unless indicated otherwise on drawings. C. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: Minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flange. 1. Nominal Thickness: As required to meet performance requirements. 2. Depth: 3/4 inch (19 mm) unless indicated on drawings. 3. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with nominal thickness of 0.040 inch (1.02 mm). 4. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.57-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.22-mm-) diameter wire. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal roof panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers. B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil (0.4- mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 2.5 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS A. General: Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips in side laps. Include clips, cleats, pressure plates, and accessories required for weathertight installation. 1. Steel Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with ASTM E 1514. 2. Aluminum Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with ASTM E 1637. 3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 4. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide SuperLok Panel as manufactured by MBCI or comparable product by one of the following: a. AEP-Span. b. Architectural Building Components. c. Architectural Metal Systems. d. Architectural Roofing and Siding, Inc. e. ATAS International, Inc. f. Berridge Manufacturing Company. g. Butler Manufacturing; a BlueScope Steel company. h. Copper Sales, Inc. i. Dimensional Metals, Inc. j. Englert, Inc. k. Fabral. l. Flexospan Steel Buildings, Inc. m. Galvamet; Galvacer Building Systems. n. IMETCO. o. Integris Metals. p. MBCI; a division of NCI Building Systems, L. P. q. McElroy Metal, Inc. METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - 4 r. Merchant & Evans. s. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC. t. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation. u. Metecno-Morin; Division of Metecno Inc. v. Modern Metal Systems, Inc. w. Petersen Aluminum Corporation. x. Steelox Systems, L.L.C. y. Ultra Seam Incorporated. z. United Steel Deck Inc.; Subsidiary of Bouras Industries Inc. 5. Profile: Vertical-rib, seamed joint, as indicated on Drawings. 6. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 24 Gauge 0.028-inch (0.71-mm) nominal thickness. a. Exterior Finish: Signature 300 (2-coat fluoropolymeror or Siliconized polyester) b. Color: Match Existing Panels or as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 7. Clips: Floating to accommodate thermal movement. a. Material: Metallic coated steel. 8. Joint Type: As standard with manufacturer. 9. Panel Coverage: Match Existing Widths. 10. Panel Height: Match Existing Height. 11. Panel Finish: Smooth Striated (standard) 2.6 METAL SOFFIT PANELS A. General: Provide factory-formed metal soffit panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners and factory-applied sealant in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation. B. Metal Soffit Panels: Match profile and material of metal roof panels. 1. Finish: Smooth . 2. Sealant: Factory applied within interlocking joint. 3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 4. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Artisan Soffit as manufactured by MBCI or comparable product by one of the following: a. AEP-Span. b. Architectural Building Components. c. ATAS International, Inc. d. Berridge Manufacturing Company. e. CENTRIA Architectural Systems. f. Cheney Flashing Company. g. Copper Sales, Inc. h. Dimensional Metals, Inc. i. Englert, Inc. j. Fabral. k. IMETCO. l. MBCI; a division of NCI Building Systems, L. P. m. McElroy Metal, Inc. n. Merchant & Evans. o. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC. p. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation. q. Petersen Aluminum Corporation. r. Ultra Seam Incorporated. 5. Profile: Flush as indicated on Drawings. 6. Material: Same material, finish, and color as metal roof panels. METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - 5 7. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 24 gauge 0.028-inch (0.71-mm) nominal thickness. a. Exterior Finish: Signature 300. ( 2-coat fluoropolymer or Siliconized polyester) b. Color: Match existing color or as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 8. Panel Coverage: 12 inches (305 mm)]. 9. Panel Height: 1.0 inch (25 mm). 10. Panel Finish: Smooth (standard) 11. Sealant: Factory applied within interlocking joint. 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components approved by roof panel manufacturer and as required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels unless otherwise indicated. 1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal roof panels. 2. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. 3. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from same material as roof panels, prepainted with coil coating, minimum 0.018 inch (0.45 mm) thick. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal roof panels. C. Gutters: Formed from same material roof panels. Match profile of gable trim, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long sections, of size and metal thickness according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Furnish gutter supports spaced a maximum of 36 inches (900 mm) o.c., fabricated from same metal as gutters. Provide wire ball strainers of compatible metal at outlets. Finish gutters to match roof fascia and rake trim. D. Downspouts: Formed from same material as roof panels. Fabricate in 10-foot- (3-m-) long sections, complete with formed elbows and offsets, of size and metal thickness according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual". Finish downspouts to match gutters. E. Roof Curbs: Fabricated from same material as roof panels, minimum .048 inch (1.2 mm) thick; with bottom of skirt profiled to match roof panel profiles, and welded top box and integral full- length cricket. Fabricate curb subframing of minimum 0.0598-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick, angle-, C-, or Z-shaped steel sheet. Fabricate curb and subframing to withstand indicated loads, of size and height indicated. Finish roof curbs to match metal roof panels. 1. Insulate roof curb with 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, rigid insulation. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Fabricate and finish metal roof panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes and as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel. C. Fabricate metal roof panel side laps with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, in a manner that will seal weathertight and minimize noise from movements within panel assembly. METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - 6 D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Miscellaneous Framing: Install subpurlins, eave angles, furring, and other miscellaneous roof panel support members and anchorage according to metal roof panel manufacturer's written instructions. 3.2 THERMAL INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Blanket Insulation: Install insulation concurrently with metal roof panel installation, in thickness indicated to cover entire roof, according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder in location indicated of construction unless otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces. 2. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation. 3. Install blankets straight and true in one-piece lengths with both sets of facing tabs sealed. Comply with the following installation method: a. Over-Purlin-with-Spacer-Block Installation: Extend insulation and vapor retarder over and perpendicular to top flange of secondary framing members. Install layer of filler insulation over first layer to fill space formed by roof panel standoffs. Hold in place by panels fastened to standoffs. 4. Retainer Strips: Install retainer strips at each longitudinal insulation joint, straight and taut, nesting with secondary framing to hold insulation in place. 5. Thermal Spacer Blocks: Where metal roof panels attach directly to purlins, install thermal spacer blocks. 3.3 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION A. Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. 1. Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners. 2. Install pressure plates at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved, motorized seamer tool so clip, metal roof panel, and factory-applied sealant are completely engaged. B. Metal Soffit Panels: Provide metal soffit panels full width of soffits. Install panels perpendicular to support framing. 1. Flash and seal panels with weather closures where metal soffit panels meet walls and at perimeter of all openings. 3.4 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. 2. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 3. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building. METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - 7 3.5 CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal roof panels are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal roof panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. END OF SECTION 074113 METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - 8 THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PROPER DOUBLE SIDED PRINTING. METAL WALL PANELS 074213 - 1 SECTION 074213 - METAL WALL PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concealed-fastener, lap-seam metal wall panels. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design metal wall panel assembly, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Structural Performance: Provide metal wall panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592: 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind pressures: a. Uniform pressure of 20 lbf/sq. ft. (957 Pa), acting inward or outward. 2. Deflection Limits: Metal wall panel assemblies shall withstand wind loads with horizontal deflections no greater than 1/180 of the span. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal wall panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory-, shop- and field- assembled work. C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal wall panel assembly indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. E. Coordination Drawings: Exterior elevations drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and wall-mounted items. F. Product test reports. G. Maintenance data. H. Warranties: Samples of special warranties. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide metal wall panels identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal wall panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal wall panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. METAL WALL PANELS 074213 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PANEL MATERIALS A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; structural quality. 2. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a. Siliconized-Polyester: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-enamel topcoat; with a dry film thickness of not less than 0.2 mil (0.005 mm) for primer and 0.8 mil (0.02 mm) for topcoat. 4. Concealed Finish: Manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish. B. Panel Sealants: 1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing; 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick. 2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920 as recommended in writing by metal wall panel manufacturer. 3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311. 2.2 FIELD-INSTALLED THERMAL INSULATION A. Refer to Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation." B. Metal Building Insulation: ASTM C 991, Type II, glass-fiber-blanket insulation; 0.5-lb/cu. ft. (8- kg/cu. m) density; 2-inch- (50-mm-) wide, continuous, vapor-tight edge tabs; and with a flame-spread index of 25 or less. 1. Vapor-Retarder Facing: ASTM C 1136, with permeance not greater than 0.02 perm (1.15 ng/Pa x s x sq. m) when tested according to ASTM E 96, Desiccant Method: a. Composition: Vinyl faced, scrim reinforced, and foil backing. 2. Insulation Retainer Strips: 0.019-inch- (0.48-mm-) thick, formed galvanized steel or PVC retainer clips colored to match insulation facing. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING A. Miscellaneous Metal Framing, General: ASTM C 645, cold-formed metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120) hot-dip galvanized or coating with equivalent corrosion resistance unless otherwise indicated. B. Subgirts: Manufacturer's standard C- or Z-shaped sections, 0.064-inch (1.63-mm) nominal thickness. C. Zee Clips: 0.079-inch (2.01-mm) nominal thickness. D. Base or Sill Angles: 0.079-inch (2.01-mm) nominal thickness. E. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: 1. Nominal Thickness: 0.040 inch (1.02 mm). 2. Depth: 7/8 inch (22 mm) unless otherwise indicated on drawings. F. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: Minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flange. 1. Nominal Thickness: As required to meet performance requirements. 2. Depth: 3/4 inch (19 mm). 3. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with 0.040-inch (1.02- mm) nominal thickness. 4. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.57-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.22-mm-) diameter wire. METAL WALL PANELS 074213 - 3 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal wall panels by means of plastic caps or factory- applied coating. Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers. 2.5 CONCEALED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS A. Provide factory-formed metal wall panels designed to be field assembled by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners and factory-applied sealant in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2.Basis-of-Design Product:Subject to compliance with requirements, provide FW panels as manufactured by MBCI or comparable product by one of the following: a. AEP-Span. b. Alcoa Architectural Products (USA). c. Architectural Building Components. d. Architectural Metal Systems. e. ATAS International, Inc. f. Berridge Manufacturing Company. g. CENTRIA Architectural Systems. h. Dimension Metals, Inc. i. Fabral. j. Flexospan Steel Buildings, Inc. k. Industrial Building Panels. l. MBCI; Div. of NCI Building Systems. m. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, L.L.C. n. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation. o. Metecno-Morin. p. Petersen Aluminum Corporation. q. Steelox Systems, L.L.C. r. United Steel Deck, Inc.; Subsidiary of Bouras Industries Inc. s. VICWEST; Div. of Jenisys Engineered Products. 3. Profile: Flush 4. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 24 gauge 0.028-inch (0.71-mm) nominal thickness. a. Exterior Finish: Signature 300.(2-coat fluoropolymer or Siliconized polyester) b. Coverage Width: 12” panels c. Finish: Smooth panel (standard) d. Profile: 1.5” thick - FW-120-0 (no bead) e. Color: Match Existing or as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal wall panels. 2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. METAL WALL PANELS 074213 - 4 3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal wall panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.018-inch (0.46-mm) minimum thickness, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal wall panels. 2.7 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate and finish metal wall panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. B. Fabricate metal wall panels in a manner that eliminates condensation on interior side of panel and with joints between panels designed to form weathertight seals. C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel. D. Fabricate metal wall panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that will minimize noise from movements within panel assembly. E. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Miscellaneous Framing: Install subgirts, base angles, sills, furring, and other miscellaneous wall panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal wall panel manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.2 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION A. Lap-Seam Metal Wall Panels: Fasten metal wall panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer. 1. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation. Apply panels and associated items for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line. 2. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal wall panels. 3. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of washer. 4. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in predrilled holes. 5. Provide sealant tape at lapped joints of metal wall panels and between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories. 6. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant tape to weather-side surface of fastenings on end laps; on side laps of nesting-type panels; on side laps of corrugated nesting-type, ribbed, or fluted panels; and elsewhere as needed to make panels weathertight. METAL WALL PANELS 074213 - 5 7. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch (152-mm) end lap, sealed with butyl- rubber sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates. B. Zee Clips: Provide Zee clips of size indicated or, if not indicated, as required to act as standoff from subgirts for thickness of insulation indicated. Attach to subgirts with fasteners. 3.3 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal wall panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal wall panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. B. After metal wall panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant. END OF SECTION 074213 METAL WALL PANELS 074213 - 6 THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PROPER DOUBLE SIDED PRINTING. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1 SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses, preparations for hardware, and other details. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required. E. Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to UL 10C. 1. Temperature-Rise Limit: Where indicated, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure. B. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9. Label each individual glazed lite. C. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Amweld Building Products, LLC. 2. Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation. 3. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 5. Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc. 6. Firedoor Corporation. 7. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company. 8. Habersham Metal Products Company. 9. Kewanee Corporation (The). 10. Mesker Door Inc. 11. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 12. Security Metal Products Corp. 13. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 14. Windsor Republic Doors. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 2 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, CS, Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, CS, Type B. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum A40 (ZF120) metallic coating. D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. G. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I. H. Glazing: Division 08 Section "Glazing." I. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15- mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. 2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. 1. Design: Flush panel unless indicated otherwise. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel- stiffener core. a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings indicated. b. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: R-value of not less than 12.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu (2.166 K x sq. m/W) when tested according to ASTM C 1363. 3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick, end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. 5. Tolerances: SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush). C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Level 1 and Physical Performance Level C (Standard Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush). a. Width: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm). D. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6. 2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as knocked down unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frames for Level 1 Steel Doors: 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick steel sheet. 4. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet. C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 3 2. Fabricate frames as knocked down unless otherwise indicated. 3. Fabricate knocked-down, drywall slip-on frames for in-place gypsum board partitions. 4. Frames for Level 1 Steel Doors: 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick steel sheet. 5. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet. D. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6. 2.5 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches (50 mm) wide by 10 inches (250 mm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch (4.5 mm) thick. 2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick. 3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors. 4. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8- inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2-inch (50-mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface. 2.6 STOPS AND MOLDINGS A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, same material as door face sheet. B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch (16 mm) high unless otherwise indicated. C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, same material as frames. 2.7 LOUVERS A. Provide sightproof louvers for interior doors, where indicated, that comply with SDI 111C, with blades or baffles formed of 0.020-inch- (0.5-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet set into 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick steel frame. 1. Fire-Rated Automatic Louvers: Movable blades closed by actuating fusible link, and listed and labeled for use in fire-rated door assemblies of type and fire- resistance rating indicated. 2.8 ACCESSORIES A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors. B. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4-inch-thick by 1-inch- (6.4-mm-thick by 25.4-mm-) wide steel. C. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick. 2.9 FABRICATION A. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117. B. Hollow Metal Doors: 1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 4 2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. 3. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. C. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. 2. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. 3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 4. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. 6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows: 1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm) high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 120 inches (3048 mm) high. b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high. 5) Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches (1066 mm) wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions. c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb. d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches (152 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches (660 mm) o.c. 7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers. a. Single-Door Frames: Three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Two door silencers. D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." 1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface- mounted door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 5 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26 electrical Sections. E. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work. 2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. 4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of installation indicated. 2.10 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 1. Shop Primer: ANSI/SDI A250.10. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Hollow Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11. 1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout containing antifreezing agents. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout. 5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Take precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged by grout forces. 6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 6 7. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 8. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members. 9. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor. B. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors: a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch (19 mm). 2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches (50 mm) o.c. from each corner. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. C. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 081113 SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 1 SECTION 083613 - SECTIONAL DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes manually and electrically operated sectional doors. B. Related Section: 1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Sectional doors shall meet performance requirements specified without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction and without requiring temporary installation of reinforcing components. B. Structural Performance: Exterior sectional doors shall withstand the effects of gravity loads, and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Wind Loads: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf/sq. ft. (960 Pa), acting inward and outward. C. Product Data: For each type and size of sectional door and accessory. D. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. E. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. F. Maintenance data. G. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Standard for Sectional Doors: Fabricate sectional doors to comply with DASMA 102 unless otherwise indicated. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sectional doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL DOOR SECTIONS A. Exterior Section Faces and Frames: Fabricate from manufacturer's standard zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled, steel sheet. 1. Roll horizontal meeting edges to a continuous, interlocking, keyed, rabbeted, shiplap, or tongue-in-groove weathertight seal, with a reinforcing flange return. 2. For insulated doors, provide sections with continuous thermal-break construction, separating the exterior and interior faces of door. SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 2 B. Section Ends and Intermediate Stiles: Enclose open ends of sections with channel end stiles formed from galvanized-steel sheet welded to door section. Provide intermediate stiles formed from galvanized-steel sheet, cut to door section profile, and welded in place. Space stiles not more than 48 inches (1219 mm) apart. C. Reinforce bottom section with a continuous channel or angle conforming to bottom- section profile and allowing installation of astragal. D. Reinforce sections with continuous horizontal and diagonal reinforcement, as required to stiffen door and for wind loading. Provide galvanized-steel bars, struts, trusses, or strip steel, formed to depth and bolted or welded in place. E. Provide reinforcement for hardware attachment. F. Thermal Insulation: Insulate interior of steel sections with door manufacturer's standard CFC-free insulation, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84. Enclose insulation completely within steel sections that incorporate the following interior facing material, with no exposed insulation: 1. Interior Facing Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet 2.2 TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES A. Tracks: Manufacturer's standard, galvanized-steel track system of configuration indicated, sized for door size and weight, designed for lift type indicated and clearances shown on Drawings. Provide complete track assembly including brackets, bracing, and reinforcement for rigid support of ball-bearing roller guides for required door type and size. Slot vertical sections of track spaced 2 inches (51 mm) apart for door-drop safety device. Slope tracks at proper angle from vertical or design tracks to ensure tight closure at jambs when door unit is closed. B. Track Reinforcement and Supports: Galvanized-steel track reinforcement and support members. Secure, reinforce, and support tracks as required for door size and weight to provide strength and rigidity without sag, sway, and vibration during opening and closing of doors. C. Weatherseals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping gaskets of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene fitted to bottom and top of sectional door unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 HARDWARE A. General: Provide heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant hardware, with hot-dip galvanized, stainless-steel, or other corrosion-resistant fasteners, to suit door type. B. Hinges: Heavy-duty, galvanized-steel hinges at each end stile and at each intermediate stile, according to manufacturer's written recommendations for door size. Attach hinges to door sections through stiles and rails. C. Rollers: Heavy-duty rollers with steel ball-bearings in case-hardened steel races, mounted with varying projections to suit slope of track. Provide 3-inch- (76-mm-) diameter roller tires for 3-inch- (76-mm-) wide track and 2-inch- (51-mm-) diameter roller tires for 2-inch- (51-mm- ) wide track. 2.4 LOCKING DEVICES A. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on single-jamb side, operable from inside only. B. Chain Lock Keeper: Suitable for padlock. C. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when door is locked. 2.5 COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM A. Torsion Spring: Counterbalance mechanism consisting of adjustable-tension torsion springs mounted on torsion shaft made of steel tube or solid steel. Provide springs designed for number of operation cycles indicated. SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 3 B. Cable Drums and Shaft for Doors: Cast-aluminum or gray-iron casting cable drums mounted on torsion shaft and grooved to receive door-lifting cables as door is raised. Mount counterbalance mechanism with manufacturer's standard ball-bearing brackets at each end of torsion shaft. C. Cables: Galvanized-steel lifting cables. D. Cable Safety Device: Include, on each side-edge of door, a device designed to automatically stop door if either lifting cable breaks. E. Bracket: Provide anchor support bracket as required to connect stationary end of spring to the wall and to level the shaft and prevent sag. F. Provide a spring bumper at each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening operation. 2.6 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS A. General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and "operation cycles" requirement specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid- operated brake, clutch, remote-control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation. 1. Comply with NFPA 70. 2. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6; with NFPA 70, Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or dc. B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than number of cycles per hour indicated for each door. C. Door-Operator Type: Unit of type indicated, consisting of electric motor, gears, pulleys, belts, sprockets, chains, and controls needed to operate door and meet required usage classification. D. Electric Motors: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements specified in Division 11 Section "Common Motor Requirements for Equipment" unless otherwise indicated. 1. Electrical Characteristics: a. Phase: Single phase. b. Volts: 115V. c. Hertz: 60. 2. Motor Type and Controller: Reversible motor and controller (disconnect switch) for motor exposure indicated. 3. Motor Size: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at a speed not less than 8 in./sec. (203 mm/s) and not more than 12 in./sec. (305 mm/s), without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor. 4. Operating Controls, Controllers (Disconnect Switches), Wiring Devices, and Wiring: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated. E. Obstruction Detection Device: Equip motorized door with indicated external automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. Activation of device immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. 1. Sensor Edge: Automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or weather stripping mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor activates device. Connect to control circuit using manufacturer's standard take-up reel or self-coiling cable. F. Remote-Control Station: Momentary-contact, three-button control station with push- button controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop." 1. Interior units, full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure. 2. Exterior units, full-guarded, standard-duty, surface-mounted, weatherproof type, NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure, key operated. SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 4 G. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip each electrically powered door with capability for emergency manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door operation does not exceed 35 lbf (155 N). H. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand-operated disconnect mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount mechanism so it is accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged. I. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation. 2.7 DOOR ASSEMBLY A. Steel Sectional Door: Sectional door formed with hinged sections. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide SERIES 625 as manufactured by Overhead Door Corporation. or comparable product by one of the following: a. Amarr Garage Doors. b. Arm-R-Lite. c. C.H.I. Overhead Doors. d. Clopay Building Products; a Griffon company. e. Fimbel Architectural Door Specialties. f. General American Door Company. g. Haas Door; a Nofziger company. h. Martin Door Manufacturing. i. Overhead Door Corporation. j. Raynor. k. Rite-Hite Corporation. l. Wayne-Dalton Corp. m. Windsor Republic Doors. B. Operation Cycles: Not less than 20,000. C. R-Value: Minimum 7.0. D. Steel Sections: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, formed into sections 3/4 inches thick. 1. Exterior-Face Surface: Paneled. 2. Interior Facing Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet. E. Track Configuration: Standard-lift track. F. Weatherseals: Fitted to bottom and top and around entire perimeter of door. Provide combination bottom weatherseal and sensor edge. G. Locking Devices: Equip door with slide bolt for padlock. H. Electric Door Operator: 1. Usage Classification: Standard duty, up to 60 cycles per hour. 2. Operator Type: Jackshaft, side mounted. 3. Motor Exposure: Interior, clean, and dry. 4. Emergency Manual Operation: Chain type. 5. Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic pneumatic sensor edge on bottom bar. 6. Remote-Control Station: Where shown on Drawings. I. Door Finish: 1. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coated Finish: Color and gloss as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Factory Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard color. 3. Finish of Interior Facing Material: Finish as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install sectional doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified. B. Tracks: Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcement as required for rigid installation of track and door-operating equipment. Repair galvanized coating on tracks according to ASTM A 780. C. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion. Adjust doors and seals to provide weathertight fit around entire perimeter. 3.2 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain sectional doors. END OF SECTION 083613 SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 6 THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PROPER DOUBLE SIDED PRINTING SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide materials under the Allowance Section 01020 for hardware items herein identified as "Allowance Items" as indicated in the drawings and specifications to be provided by the Architect after the bidding period. B. Thresholds, weatherstrips, soundstrips, and lightstrips shall be furnished under this section of the Project Manual. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Carpentry, Rough and Finish B. Custom Hollow Metal Work C. Painting 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit templates to door and door frame manufacturer. B. Submit detailed hardware schedule for each item receiving hardware. C. Submit manufacturer's literature for each hardware item. 1.04 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Instructions to Bidders. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers/Products 1. Acceptable manufacturers for various types of products are listed below. An asterisk (*) following a manufacturer’s name designates manufacturer whose products are indicated in Finish Hardware Schedule. Such products are listed in the schedule by specific reference to manufacturer’s catalog numbers. Except as otherwise indicated, products of equivalent quality, design and function by other listed manufacturers may be used subject to approval of Architect. B. Butt Hinges 1. Henry Soss & Co. 2. Hager Hinge Co. 3. McKinney Mfg. 4. Stanley Hardware* 5. Lawerence 6. PBB C. Door Closers 1. LCN Door Closer Co. 2. Norton Door Closer Co. 3. Yale Hardware 4. Sargent* D. Cylinders/Locks 1. Schlage and Company E. Exit Devices 1. Von Duprin, Inc. F. Locksets and Deadlocks 1. Falcon (Interchangable cores) G. Pulls, Push Bars, Push Plates, and Kick Plates 1. Brookline Industries DOOR HARDWARE 087100-1 2. Trimco Hardware* 3. Quality Hardware 4. Builders Brass Works H. Pivots, Stops, Holders, Silencers, Flush Bolt, and Dustproof Strikes 1. Glynn Johnson Corp. 2. Trimco Hardware* 3. Quality Hardware 4. Builders Brass Works 5. Monarch I. Door Bottoms 1. National Guard Products 2. Pemko* 3. Ultra 4. A. J. May Company J. Thresholds, Weatherstrips, Soundstrips and Lightstrips 1. Zero International, Inc. 2. A. J. May 3. Accurate Metal Weatherstripping Company 4. Balco, Inc. 5. Pemko* 6. Metalines, Inc. 2.02 PRODUCTS A. General 1. All keyed locking hardware shall be compatible with existing buildings and keyed into the existing master keyed system. Cores shall be interchangable. 2. Where items of hardware herein are specified by reference numbers of manufacturers, they are taken from catalogs of the named manufacturers. 3. Hardware by manufacturers listed above of equivalent quality and function and similar in design that is compatible with existing will also be considered subject to the Architect’s approval of both samples and schedules; however, manufacturers other than those listed must provide written approval of substitution prior to receipt of bids. 4. All hardware shall comply with applicable Fire and Building Codes regardless of hardware specified. 5. The General Contractor shall include in his proposal the cost of installation of all hardware under this Section. 6. The hardware suppliers shall be responsible for reviewing drawings and schedules and providing compatible items of hardware for proper operation and code requirements whether or not indicated as such in the hardware schedule. 7. All hardware to comply with ADA and Texas Accessibility Standards. 8. Provide rubber silencers for interior metal frames, 3 for each single door and 6 for each pair of doors, except at doors to receive stripping and seals. 9. Products and packages shall be consistent with all existing hardware systems in the current facility. 10. Hardware supplier or GC shall familiarize themselves with existing hardware systems and match to best possible extent. 11. All exterior doors shall be provided with all hardware and weather stripping to provide a weather tight opening. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION A. Prepare a complete schedule including all items proposed for each opening and other miscellaneous items and submit four copies to the Architect for approval within four (4) weeks of award of the general construction contract. 1. Lock Cylinders and Keying 2. General: The General Contractor will be responsible for changing out the construction cores with the permanent cores. 3. Keying for locks to be installed in the project will be set up under a sub-control key system matching the existing system. B. Marking and Delivery: Mark each item of hardware for opening on which it is to be used and deliver a complete schedule to the Contractor when hardware is delivered. Should the marking on any item become separated from the item after delivery, the item will be returned to the supplier by the Contractor for remarking before attempting to install it. C. Prior to the final inspection by the Architect, the supplier shall check all closers for proper operation after they have been installed and adjusted by the Contractor, and he shall make necessary adjustments to those closers which prove to be difficult to adjust upon the initial attempt of the Contractor. He shall verify the keying to insure proper location of locksets and shall assist the Contractor in correcting faulty operation of any lock called to his attention by the Contractor. D. The hardware supplier shall be responsible for reviewing drawings and schedules and providing compatible items of hardware for proper operation and code requirements whether or not indicated as such in the hardware schedule. E. Install all items in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions. F. Thresholds and Weatherstrips: Install to provide weathertight installation. Care shall be taken to install thresholds the full width of the opening and they shall be set in full sealant bed. G. Soundstrips: Install to provide continuous coverage to area where sound stripping is required, set in sealant bed. END OF SECTION SCHEDULE ON FOLLOWING TWO (2) PAGES DOOR HARDWARE 087100-3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE RECAP Item Description Product Finish Manufacturer B-1 Hinges TA2714 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 626 McKinney C-1 Closer 8501BF 689 Norton E-1 Exit Device Trim AU626F 626 Yale Inc. L-1 Rim Cylinder 70-34 x 90 1/4 626 Sargent L-2 Classroom Lockset B-AU-YMCL 108 Less Core 626 Yale Inc. L-3 Storeroom Lockset B-AU-4705LN x K925 x CT7SD 626 Yale Inc. L-4 Office Lockset 5404LN 626 Yale Inc. L-5 Permanent Core 73-7P 626 Sargent S-1 Silencers 307D Grey Rockwood S-2 Floor Stop 441 626 Rockwood S-3 Silicon Seal S88D-17' Bronze Pemko S-4 Weatherstrip 2903AV 36" x 80" Alum Pemko T-1 Threshold 2005AV x 36" 689 Pemko HARDWARE SCHEDULE ITEM DESCRIPTION PRODUCT FINISH MANUFACTURER HW SET #1 - INTERIOR TYPICAL (Storeroom) - SINGLE (NON-RATED) DOORS MARKED # 10, 11 3 Ea B-1 HINGES TA2714 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 626 MC KINNEY 1 Ea L-5 PERMANENT CORE 7P-7300B 626 SARGENT 1 Ea L-3 STOREROOM LOCKSET B-AU-4705LN x K925 x CT7SD 626 YALE INC. 3 Ea S-1 SILENCERS 608 Grey ROCKWOOD 1 Ea S-2 FLOORSTOP 441 626 ROCKWOOD HW SET #2 - INTERIOR TYPICAL (Storeroom) - SINGLE (RATED) DOORS MARKED # 17, 18 3 Ea B-1 HINGES TA2714 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 626 MC KINNEY C-1 CLOSER 8501BF 689 NORTON 1 Ea L-3 STOREROOM LOCKSET B-AU-4705LN x K925 x CT7SD 626 YALE INC. 1 Ea L-5 PERMANENT CORE 7P-7300B 626 SARGENT 3 Ea S-1 SILENCERS 608 Grey ROCKWOOD 1 Ea S-2 FLOORSTOP 441 626 ROCKWOOD 1 Ea S-3 SILICON SEAL S88D-17' Bronze PEMKO DOOR HARDWARE 087100-4 HW SET #3 - INTERIOR TYPICAL (Classroom) - SINGLE (NON-RATED) DOORS MARKED # 08 3 Ea B-1 HINGES TA2714 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 626 MC KINNEY 1 Ea C-1 CLOSER 8501BF 689 NORTON 1 Ea L-2 CLASSROOM LOCK B-AU-YMCL 108 Less Core 626 YALE INC. 1 Ea L-5 PERMANENT CORE 73-7P 626 SARGENT 3 Ea S-1 SILENCERS 307D Grey ROCKWOOD 1 Ea S-2 FLOORSTOP 441 626 ROCKWOOD HW SET #4 - EXTERIOR SINGLE EXIT (NON-RATED) DOORS MARKED # 9, 13, 19 3 Ea B-3 HINGES TA2714 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP 626 MC KINNEY 1 Ea C-1 CLOSER 8501BF 689 NORTON 1 Ea L-4 OFFICE LOCKSET 5404LN 626 YALE INC. 1 Ea L-5 PERMANENT CORE 7P-7300B 626 SARGENT 3 Ea S-1 SILENCERS 307D Grey ROCKWOOD 1 Ea T-1 THRESHOLD 2005AV x 36" 689 PEMKO 1 Ea S-6 WEATHERSTRIP 2903AV 36" x 80" Alum PEMKO ** OPENINGS MARKED 12, 14, 15, 16, 1E, 2E, 3E, 4E, 5E, 6E, 7E DOOR HARDWARE 087100-5 DOOR HARDWARE 087100-1 SECTION 08715 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide materials under the Allowance Section 01020 for hardware items herein identified as "Allowance Items" as indicated in the drawings and specifications to be provided by the Architect after the bidding period. B. Thresholds, weatherstrips, soundstrips, and lightstrips shall be furnished under this section of the Project Manual. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Carpentry, Rough and Finish B. Custom Hollow Metal Work C. Painting 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit templates to door and door frame manufacturer. B. Submit detailed hardware schedule for each item receiving hardware. C. Submit manufacturer's literature for each hardware item. 1.04 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Instructions to Bidders. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers/Products 1. Acceptable manufacturers for various types of products are listed below. An asterisk (*) following a manufacturer’s name designates manufacturer whose products are indicated in Finish Hardware Schedule. Such products are listed in the schedule by specific reference to manufacturer’s catalog numbers. Except as otherwise indicated, products of equivalent quality, design and function by other listed manufacturers may be used subject to approval of Architect. B. Butt Hinges 1. Henry Soss & Co. 2. Hager Hinge Co. 3. McKinney Mfg. 4. Stanley Hardware* 5. Lawerence 6. PBB C. Door Closers 1. LCN Door Closer Co. 2. Norton Door Closer Co. 3. Yale Hardware 4. Sargent* D. Cylinders/Locks 1. Schlage and Company E. Exit Devices 1. Von Duprin, Inc. F. Locksets and Deadlocks 1. Falcon (Interchangable cores) G. Pulls, Push Bars, Push Plates, and Kick Plates 1. Brookline Industries DOOR HARDWARE 087100-2 2. Trimco Hardware* 3. Quality Hardware 4. Builders Brass Works H. Pivots, Stops, Holders, Silencers, Flush Bolt, and Dustproof Strikes 1. Glynn Johnson Corp. 2. Trimco Hardware* 3. Quality Hardware 4. Builders Brass Works 5. Monarch I. Door Bottoms 1. National Guard Products 2. Pemko* 3. Ultra 4. A. J. May Company J. Thresholds, Weatherstrips, Soundstrips and Lightstrips 1. Zero International, Inc. 2. A. J. May 3. Accurate Metal Weatherstripping Company 4. Balco, Inc. 5. Pemko* 6. Metalines, Inc. 2.02 PRODUCTS A. General 1. All keyed locking hardware shall be compatible with existing buildings and keyed into the existing master keyed system. Cores shall be interchangable. 2. Where items of hardware herein are specified by reference numbers of manufacturers, they are taken from catalogs of the named manufacturers. 3. Hardware by manufacturers listed above of equivalent quality and function and similar in design that is compatible with existing will also be considered subject to the Architect’s approval of both samples and schedules; however, manufacturers other than those listed must provide written approval of substitution prior to receipt of bids. 4. All hardware shall comply with applicable Fire and Building Codes regardless of hardware specified. 5. The General Contractor shall include in his proposal the cost of installation of all hardware under this Section. 6. The hardware suppliers shall be responsible for reviewing drawings and schedules and providing compatible items of hardware for proper operation and code requirements whether or not indicated as such in the hardware schedule. 7. All hardware to comply with ADA and Texas Accessibility Standards. 8. Provide rubber silencers for interior metal frames, 3 for each single door and 6 for each pair of doors, except at doors to receive stripping and seals. 9. Products and packages shall be consistent with all existing hardware systems in the current facility. 10. Hardware supplier or GC shall familiarize themselves with existing hardware systems and match to best possible extent. 11. All exterior doors shall be provided with all hardware and weather stripping to provide a weather tight opening. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION A. Prepare a complete schedule including all items proposed for each opening and other miscellaneous items and submit four copies to the Architect for approval within four (4) weeks of award of the general construction contract. 1. Lock Cylinders and Keying 2. General: The General Contractor will be responsible for changing out the construction cores with the permanent cores. 3. Keying for locks to be installed in the project will be set up under a sub-control key system matching the existing system. B. Marking and Delivery: Mark each item of hardware for opening on which it is to be used and deliver a complete schedule to the Contractor when hardware is delivered. Should the marking on any item become separated from the item after delivery, the item will be returned to the supplier by the Contractor for remarking before attempting to install it. C. Prior to the final inspection by the Architect, the supplier shall check all closers for proper operation after they have been installed and adjusted by the Contractor, and he shall make necessary adjustments to those closers which prove to be difficult to adjust upon the initial attempt of the Contractor. He shall verify the keying to insure proper location of locksets and shall assist the Contractor in correcting faulty operation of any lock called to his attention by the Contractor. D. The hardware supplier shall be responsible for reviewing drawings and schedules and providing compatible items of hardware for proper operation and code requirements whether or not indicated as such in the hardware schedule. E. Install all items in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions. F. Thresholds and Weatherstrips: Install to provide weathertight installation. Care shall be taken to install thresholds the full width of the opening and they shall be set in full sealant bed. G. Soundstrips: Install to provide continuous coverage to area where sound stripping is required, set in sealant bed. END OF SECTION SCHEDULE ON FOLOOWING TWO (2) PAGES DOOR HARDWARE 087100-4 HARDWARE SCHEDULE RECAP Item Description Product Finish Manufacturer B-1 Hinges TA2714 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 626 McKinney C-1 Closer 8501BF 689 Norton E-1 Exit Device Trim AU626F 626 Yale Inc. L-1 Rim Cylinder 70-34 x 90 1/4 626 Sargent L-2 Classroom Lockset B-AU-YMCL 108 Less Core 626 Yale Inc. L-3 Storeroom Lockset B-AU-4705LN x K925 x CT7SD 626 Yale Inc. L-4 Office Lockset 5404LN 626 Yale Inc. L-5 Permanent Core 73-7P 626 Sargent S-1 Silencers 307D Grey Rockwood S-2 Floor Stop 441 626 Rockwood S-3 Silicon Seal S88D-17' Bronze Pemko S-4 Weatherstrip 2903AV 36" x 80" Alum Pemko T-1 Threshold 2005AV x 36" 689 Pemko HARDWARE SCHEDULE ITEM DESCRIPTION PRODUCT FINISH MANUFACTURER HW SET #1 - INTERIOR TYPICAL (Storeroom) - SINGLE (NON-RATED) DOORS MARKED # 10, 11 3Ea B-1 HINGES TA2714 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 626 MC KINNEY 1Ea L-5 PERMANENT CORE 7P-7300B 626 SARGENT 1Ea L-3 STOREROOM LOCKSET B-AU-4705LN x K925 x CT7SD 626 YALE INC. 3Ea S-1 SILENCERS 608 Grey ROCKWOOD 1Ea S-2 FLOORSTOP 441 626 ROCKWOOD HW SET #2 - INTERIOR TYPICAL (Storeroom) - SINGLE (RATED) DOORS MARKED # 17, 18 3Ea B-1 HINGES TA2714 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 626 MC KINNEY C-1 CLOSER 8501BF 689 NORTON 1Ea L-3 STOREROOM LOCKSET B-AU-4705LN x K925 x CT7SD 626 YALE INC. 1Ea L-5 PERMANENT CORE 7P-7300B 626 SARGENT 3Ea S-1 SILENCERS 608 Grey ROCKWOOD 1Ea S-2 FLOORSTOP 441 626 ROCKWOOD 1Ea S-3 SILICON SEAL S88D-17' Bronze PEMKO DOOR HARDWARE 087100-5 HW SET #3 - INTERIOR TYPICAL (Classroom) - SINGLE (NON-RATED) DOORS MARKED # 08 3Ea B-1 HINGES TA2714 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 626 MC KINNEY 1Ea C-1 CLOSER 8501BF 689 NORTON 1Ea L-2 CLASSROOM LOCK B-AU-YMCL 108 Less Core 626 YALE INC. 1Ea L-5 PERMANENT CORE 73-7P 626 SARGENT 3Ea S-1 SILENCERS 307D Grey ROCKWOOD 1Ea S-2 FLOORSTOP 441 626 ROCKWOOD HW SET #4 - EXTERIOR SINGLE EXIT (NON-RATED) DOORS MARKED # 9, 13, 19 3Ea B-3 HINGES TA2714 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP 626 MC KINNEY 1Ea C-1 CLOSER 8501BF 689 NORTON 1Ea L-4 OFFICE LOCKSET 5404LN 626 YALE INC. 1Ea L-5 PERMANENT CORE 7P-7300B 626 SARGENT 3Ea S-1 SILENCERS 307D Grey ROCKWOOD 1Ea T-1 THRESHOLD 2005AV x 36" 689 PEMKO 1Ea S-6 WEATHERSTRIP 2903AV 36" x 80" Alum PEMKO ** OPENINGS MARKED 12, 14, 15, 16, 1E, 2E, 3E, 4E, 5E, 6E, 7E GLAZING 088000 - 1 SECTION 088000 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Windows. 2. Doors. 3. Interior borrowed lites. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings or as required by local jurisdiction. 2. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design glass to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-duration load. 1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazing material type, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants. 1. Testing will not be required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches (300 mm) square. C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. D. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and AAMA TIR-A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines." 2. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped Glazing." 3. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. C. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rated glazing with certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, whether glazing is for use in fire doors or other openings, whether or not glazing passes hose-stream test, whether or not glazing has a temperature rise rating of 450 deg F (250 deg C), and the fire-resistance rating in minutes. GLAZING 088000 - 2 1.6 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which laminated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated. B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass. C. Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Provide exterior glazing that passes basic protection testing requirements in ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 1 when tested according to ASTM E 1886. Test specimens shall be no smaller in width and length than glazing indicated for use on the Project and shall be installed in same manner as glazing indicated for use on the Project. 1. Large-Missile Test: For glazing located within 30 feet (9.1 m) of grade. 2. Small-Missile Test: For glazing located more than 30 feet (9.1 m) above grade. D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K). 2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 3. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300. 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. AFG Industries, Inc.; Krystal Klear. b. Guardian Industries Corp.; Ultrawhite. c. Pilkington North America; Optiwhite. GLAZING 088000 - 3 d. PPG Industries, Inc.; Starphire. B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated. C. Pyrolytic-Coated, Self-Cleaning, Low-Maintenance Glass: Clear float glass with a coating on first surface having both photocatalytic and hydrophilic properties that act to loosen dirt and to cause water to sheet evenly over the glass instead of beading. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. AFG Industries, Inc.; Spotless Ti. b. Cardinal Glass Industries; LoE2 Plus. c. Pilkington North America; Activ. d. PPG Industries, Inc.; SunClean. D. Uncoated Tinted Float Glass: Class 2, complying with other requirements specified. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 6mm (1/4’) Optifloat Grey Tinted glazing as manufactured by Pilkington North America or comparable product by one of the following: a. AFG Industries, Inc. . b. Guardian Industries Corp. c. PPG Industries, Inc. 2. Tint Color: Gray. 2.3 INSULATING GLASS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 6mm (1/4”) exterior Solar-E w/ Grey on #2 surface glazing with 13mm (1/2”) Argon fill and 6mm (1/4”) interior Optifloat clear glazing as manufactured by Pilkington North America or comparable product by one of the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AFG Industries, Inc. 2. Guardian Industries Corp. 3. PPG Industries, Inc. C. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified. 1. Sealing System: Dual seal. 2.4 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING A. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing, General: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252 for door assemblies and NFPA 257 for window assemblies. B. Film-Faced Ceramic Glazing: Clear, ceramic flat glass; 3/16-inch (5-mm) nominal thickness; faced on one surface with a clear glazing film; complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd. (distributed by Technical Glass Products); FireLite NT. b. Safti First; SuperLite C/SP. c. Schott North America, Inc.; Filmed Pyran Star. d. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain; SGG Keralite FR-F. C. Laminated Ceramic Glazing: Laminated glass made from 2 plies of clear, ceramic flat glass; 5/16-inch (8-mm) total nominal thickness; complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials. GLAZING 088000 - 4 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd. (distributed by Technical Glass Products); FireLite Plus. b. Schott North America, Inc.; Laminated Pyran Crystal. c. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain; SGG Keralite FR-L. D. Laminated Glass with Intumescent Interlayers: Laminated glass made from multiple plies of uncoated, clear float glass; with intumescent interlayers; complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. InterEdge, Inc., a subsidiary of AFG Industries, Inc.; Pyrobel. b. Pilkington Group Limited (distributed by Technical Glass Products); PyroStop. E. Gel-Filled, Double Glazing Units: Double glazing units made from two lites of uncoated, clear, fully tempered float glass; with a perimeter metal spacer separating lites and dual- edge seal enclosing a cavity filled with clear, fully transparent, heat-absorbing gel; complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Safti First; SuperLite II. 2.5 GLAZING GASKETS A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from the following: 1. Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864. 2. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864. B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned neoprene or EPDM gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. 1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing. 2.6 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: 1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating- glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of 3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT. C. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Products that are approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which they are used for applications and fire-protection ratings indicated. 2.7 GLAZING TAPES A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for GLAZING 088000 - 5 application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. B. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. C. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. D. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). E. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. F. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire-protection rating indicated. 2.9 GLASS TYPES A. Types listed below encompass all possible types of glazing. Only those listed and identified on the drawings shall be required for this project. Schedules and glazing types are indicated on A6.XX Series Sheets under Architectural Schedules. B.Glass Type GL-1:Low-e-coated, tinted insulating glass. 1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm. 3. Outdoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass 4. Interspace Content: Argon. 5. Indoor Lite: Float glass. 6. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic on second or Pyrolytic on third surface. 7. Visible Light Transmittance: 25 percent minimum. 8. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.28 Btu/hr ft2 °F maximum. 9. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.29 Btu/hr ft2 °F maximum. 10. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.27 maximum. 11. Provide safety glazing labeling. C.Glass Type GL-2:Clear or Tinted fully tempered float glass. 1. Thickness: 6.0 mm . 2. Provide safety glazing labeling. D.Glass Type GL-3:Clear float glass. 1. Thickness: 6.0 mm. E.Glass Type GL-4:UltraClear insulating glass. (interior applications) 1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm. 3. Outdoor Lite: Ultraclear fully tempered float glass. 4. Interspace Content: Air. GLAZING 088000 - 6 5. Indoor Lite: Ultraclear fuAlly tempered float glass. 6. Provide safety glazing labeling. F.Glass Type GL-5:20-minute fire-rated glazing with hose-stream test; film-faced ceramic glazing or laminated ceramic glazing. 1. Provide safety glazing labeling. G.Glass Type GL-6:45-minute/60-minute/90-minute/120-minute fire-rated glazing; film-faced ceramic glazing or laminated ceramic glazing or laminated glass with intumescent interlayers or [gel-filled, double glazing units. 1. Required rating shall be as indicated on drawings on schedules. H.Glass Type GL-7:Pyrolytic-coated, self-cleaning, low-maintenance, clear float glass. 1. Thickness: 6.0 mm. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm). H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. 3.2 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. G. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. GLAZING 088000 - 7 3.3 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.4 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. END OF SECTION 088000 GLAZING 088000 - 8 THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PROPER DOUBLE SIDED PRINTING. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1 SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings and soffits. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested according to ASTM E 119. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413. 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs and runners of equivalent minimum base-metal thickness. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings [3-5/8 inches (92 mm)] [6 inches (152 mm)] [2-1/2 inches (64 mm)]. B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated on drawings provide one of the following in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs: 1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (51-mm-) deep flanges, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches (305 mm) of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing. 2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- (51-mm-) deep flanges and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner. 3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes due to deflection of structure above. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. 2) MBA Building Supplies; FlatSteel Deflection Track or Slotted Deflecto Track. 3) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD or VertiTrack VTD Series. 4) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT). 5) Telling Industries; Vertical Slip Track or Vertical Slip Track II. C. Firestop Tracks: Located on fire resistive partitions only. Manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire- resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings or 0.027 inch (0.68 mm). E. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings or 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) minimum.. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 2 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.72-mm-) thick, galvanized steel. F. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch (0.84 mm). 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings 7/8 inch (22.2 mm) or 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm). G. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: hat shaped. H. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum uncoated-steel thickness of 0.033 inch (0.8 mm). 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire. I. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (31.8 mm)>, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22 mm), minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.018 inch (0.45 mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. 2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire. B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch (4.12 mm) in diameter. D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch (25 by 5 mm) by length indicated. E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053 inch (1.34 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges. 1. Depth: 2 inches (51 mm) minimum. F. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2- inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges, 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep. 2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.[ Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs and runners of equivalent minimum base-metal thickness.] a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: [As indicated on Drawings or minimum 0.027 inch (0.68 mm). b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings or minimum 1-5/8 inches (41 mm). 3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22 mm) deep. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch (0.84 mm). 4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) deep members designed to reduce sound transmission. a. Configuration: hat shaped. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide asphalt saturated organic felt or foam gasket. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 3 B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.2 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch (13-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance- rated assembly indicated. 5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. 6. Curved Partitions: a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs. b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs. On straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. E. Direct Furring: 1. Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. F. Z-Furring Members: 1. Erect insulation vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 4 channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches (305 mm) from corner and cut insulation to fit. G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.3 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 3. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 4. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports. E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION 092216 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1 SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits. 3. Tile backing panels. 4. Texture finishes. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: 1. Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard size for each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. American Gypsum. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 4. Lafarge North America Inc. 5. National Gypsum Company. 6. PABCO Gypsum. 7. Temple-Inland. 8. USG Corporation. B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. C. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered. D. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered. E. Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M, Level 2. 1. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10. F. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold- resistant core and paper surfaces. 1. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 2 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10. 2.3 EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS A. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Gypsum. b. CertainTeed Corp. c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. d. Lafarge North America Inc. e. National Gypsum Company. f. PABCO Gypsum. g. Temple-Inland. h. USG Corporation. 2. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. B. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, with fiberglass mat laminated to both sides and with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; GlasRoc Sheathing. b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; Dens-Glass Gold. c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond, e(2)XP. d. USG Corporation; Securock Glass Mat Sheathing. 2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; GlasRoc Tile Backer. b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensShield Tile Backer. 2. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10. B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. C-Cure; C-Cure Board 990. b. CertainTeed Corp.; FiberCement BackerBoard. c. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. d. James Hardie Building Products, Inc.; Hardiebacker . e. National Gypsum Company, Permabase Cement Board. f. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. 2. Thickness: As indicated. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10. 2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper- faced galvanized steel sheet. B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc. C. Aluminum Trim: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 3 2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper. 3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 4. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing). D. Acoustical Joint Sealant: ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings as demonstrated by testing according to ASTM E 90. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC. c. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR. d. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. e. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation." F. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation." 2.8 TEXTURE FINISHES A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer. B. Aggregate Finish: Water-based, job-mixed, aggregated, drying-type texture finish for spray application. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; ProRoc Wall and Ceiling Spray Texture. b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; ToughRock Ceiling Textures/Vermiculite. c. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Wall and Ceiling Spray Texture (Aggregated). 2. Texture: Spatter knock-down. C. Non-Aggregate Finish: Pre-mixed, vinyl texture finish for spray application. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; ProRoc Easi-Tex Spray Texture. b. USG Corporation; BEADEX FasTex Wall and Ceiling Spray Texture. 2. Texture: Orange Peel. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 4 D. Install trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings. 2. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. E. Prefill open joints,rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. F. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. G. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile or Panels that are substrate for acoustical tile. 3. Level 3: Only where indicated on Drawings. 4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections. 5. Level 5: Only where indicated on Drawings. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections. H. Texture Finish Application: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture matching approved mockup and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns. I. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and texture finishes and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. J. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. END OF SECTION 092900 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1 SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient base. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive resilient products. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer. C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT BASE A. Resilient Base: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Allstate Rubber Corp.; Stoler Industries. b. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. c. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. d. Endura Rubber Flooring; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. e. Estrie Products International; American Biltrite (Canada) Ltd. f. Flexco, Inc. g. Johnsonite. h. Mondo Rubber International, Inc. i. Musson, R. C. Rubber Co. j. Nora Rubber Flooring; Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc. k. PRF USA, Inc. l. Roppe Corporation, USA. m. VPI, LLC; Floor Products Division. B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861. 1. Material Requirement: Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic). 2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous). 3. Style: Cove (base with toe). C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). D. Height: 4 inches (102 mm) or 6 inches (152 mm) as indicated on Drawings. E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. F. Outside Corners: Preformed. G. Inside Corners: Preformed. H. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 2 I. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. a. Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L. C. Stair-Tread-Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient tread manufacturer to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. D. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints. E. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by resilient stair tread manufacturer. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Treads and Accessories: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. 3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. 3.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. B. Resilient Stair Accessories: 1. Use stair-tread-nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. 2. Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. 3. For treads installed as separate, equal-length units, install to produce a flush joint between units. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 3 C. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet and resilient floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products. B. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from resilient stair treads before applying liquid floor polish. 1. Apply two coats. C. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 4 THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PROPER DOUBLE SIDED PRINTING. EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 1 SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates. 1. Concrete. (only as identified on drawings and schedules) 2. Clay masonry. (only as identified on drawings and schedules) 3. Concrete masonry units (CMU). (only as identified on drawings and schedules) 4. All exposed Steel. 5. All exposed Galvanized metal. 6. All exposed ferrous miscellaneous metals. 7. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated). 8. Stainless-steel flashing. (only as identified on drawings and schedules.) 9. All exposed Wood. 10. Plastic trim fabrications. (only as identified on drawings and schedules) 11. Exterior portland cement plaster (stucco). (only as identified on drawings and schedules) 12. All exposed conduit, outlet boxes, and electrical cabinets or components. 13. Any prime coated hardware or components exposed. 14. All exposed pipe, plumbing, ductwork or other mechanical components. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. C. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. D. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. E. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. F. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Samples: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat. C. Product List: For each product indicated. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: Not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 2 a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles for the paint category indicated.Sherwin Williams is Basis for Design on all products. Other acceptable manufacturers for products are as follows: a. Benjamin Moore b. Coronado Paint Co. c. Devoe Paint d. Pittsburgh Paints e. PPG Industries f.Others approved by Method of Substitution 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 1. Up to 20 percent of surface area may be painted with deep tones. 2.3 BLOCK FILLERS A. Block Filler, Latex, Interior/Exterior: 1. Sherwin Williams; PrepRite Block Filler 2.4 PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Primer, Alkali Resistant, Water Based: 1. Sherwin Williams; Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer. B. Primer, Bonding, Water Based: 1. Sherwin Williams; Primer Rx 2.5 METAL PRIMERS A. Primer, Anti-Corrosive for Metal: 1. Sherwin Williams; Pro-Cryl Universal Primer. B. Primer, Alkyd, Quick Dry, for Metal: 1. Sherwin Williams; Fast Drying Primer. C. Primer, Galvanized, Water Based: 1. Sherwin Williams; All Surface Enamel Latex Primer. 2.6 WOOD PRIMERS A. Primer, Latex for Exterior Wood: 1. Sherwin Williams; Exterior Wood Latex Primer. B. Primer, Oil for Exterior Wood: 1. Sherwin Williams; Exterior Oil Bases Wood Primer 2.7 WATER-BASED PAINTS A. Latex, Exterior Flat (Gloss Level 1): 1. Sherwin Williams; Resilience Exterior Acrylic Latex. B. Latex, Exterior Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): 1. Sherwin Williams; Resilience Exterior Acrylic Latex. C. Latex, Exterior, Gloss (Gloss Level 6: EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 3 1. Sherwin Williams; Resilience Exterior Acrylic Latex. D. Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based (Gloss Level 3): 1. Sherwin Williams; Pro Industrial Acrylic Coating. E. Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): 1. Sherwin Williams, Pro Industrial Acrylic Coating. F. Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): 1. Sherwin Williams, Pro Industrial Acrylic Coating. 2.8 SOLVENT-BASED PAINTS A. Alkyd, Exterior 1. Sherwin Williams; All Surface Enamel Oil Base. 2.9 FLOOR COATINGS A. Sealer, Water Based, for Concrete Floors: 1. *Nox Crete; Cure & Seal 100-300E , Cure & Seal 1200E 2. Hilyard Chemical Co; Top Shape 3. Endu-o-seal USA; HydraSEAL, HydraLOCK 4. BASF; Kure-N-Seal 30, Kure-N-Seal WB B. Floor Paint, Latex, Low Gloss (Maximum Gloss Level 3): 1. Sherwin Williams; AmorSeal Tread-Plex Water based Acrylic. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Portland Cement Plaster: 12 percent. 5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual." B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. B. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 4 3.5 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Items to be painted shall be noted or indicated on drawings. Not all paint systems listed below are required on every project. As drawings notations list substrates to receive paint, the schedule below applies. B. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. b. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (Gloss Level 3-4). C. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces: 1. Latex Floor Paint System: a. Prime Coat: Floor paint, latex, low gloss (maximum Gloss Level 3). b. Topcoat: Floor paint, latex, low gloss (maximum Gloss Level 3). 2. Water-Based Clear Sealer System: a. Prime Coat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors. b. Topcoat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors. D. Clay-Masonry Substrates: 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. b. Topcoat: Latex, exterior flat (Gloss Level 1.) 2. High-Build Latex System: Dry film thickness not less than 10 mils (0.25 mm). a. Prime Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. b. Intermediate Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, high build. E. CMU Substrates: 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior flat (Gloss Level 1). F. Steel Substrates: 1. Alkyd System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anticorrosive for metal. b. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Division 05 Section where substrate is specified. c. Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, flat (Gloss Level 1). G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based. b. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized metal, as recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use on galvanized-metal substrates with topcoat indicated. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (Gloss Level 3-4). 2. Alkyd System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized metal, as recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use on galvanized-metal substrates with topcoat indicated. b. Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5). H. Wood Substrates: Including wood trim, architectural woodwork, doors, windows, wood siding, wood fences, wood-based panel products, glued-laminated construction, exposed joists and exposed beams. 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex for exterior wood. EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 5 b. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (Gloss Level 3-4). 2. Alkyd System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd for exterior wood. b. Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, flat (Gloss Level 5). I. Wood Substrates, Traffic Surfaces: Including stairs. 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex for exterior wood. b. Topcoat: Interior/exterior latex floor and porch (low gloss). 1) With additive to increase skid resistance of painted surface. J. Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates: 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, water based. b. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (Gloss Level 3-4). K. Portland Cement Plaster Substrates: 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (Gloss Level 3-4). 2. High-Build Latex System: Dry film thickness not less than 10 mils (0.25 mm). a. Prime Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. b. Intermediate Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, high build. L. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. b. Topcoat: Latex, exterior flat (Gloss Level 1). END OF SECTION 099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 6 THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PROPER DOUBLE SIDED PRINTING. PAINTING 099103-1 SECTION 099103 - PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Work Included: Work under this section includes furnishing all labor, material, equipment and accessories necessary for the completion of all painting, generally outlined as follows: 1. New Construction and Renovations: a. All gypsum board walls and ceilings as scheduled. b. All hollow metal doors and frames. c. All exposed structural steel & decking. d. All exposed ferrous miscellaneous metals, interior and exterior. e. All stained wood doors. f. All interior wood. g. All prime coated hardware. h. All exposed conduit, outlet boxes and electrical cabinets. i. All exposed pipe, plumbing and ductwork excluding those items located in mechanical rooms. j. All metal grilles except aluminum unless otherwise indicated. k. All exposed concrete masonry units. l. Texturing of gypsum board m. All exposed galvanized metal B. Work Excluded 1. All Areas of construction or renovation: a. Shop coat of paint on metal. b. Mechanical room walls. c. Pre-finished sheet metal 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Apply materials directly from containers in which material is purchased except when use of other containers is approved by Architect. B. Subcontractor shall provide to the Owner and Architect a notarized certification that paint used is as specified in writing by the Architect. C. Number of coats of each of several finishes shall be in accordance with detailed specifications, which contemplate use of materials which will produce first quality finish if properly applied. If number of coats specified fails to produce a finish acceptable to Architect, this Contractor shall apply additional coat or coats at his own expense until an acceptable finish is achieved. D. Where necessary to this any oil vehicle painting materials, use either pure linseed oil or turpentine unless the manufacturer of the material involved calls for other types of thinners. E. Tint each coat of paint a different shade from preceding coat. F. Certain specific manufacturer's products are specified herein to simplify description of type and quality of finish desired. Substitutions must be approved by the Architect. G. Shellacs, oils, turpentine, etc., shall be of best quality. H. When use or application of any material required by drawings and specifications is at variance with manufacturer's specifications, Architect shall be notified at once in writing, and Architect will publish a clarification. This does not relieve this contractor of responsibility of an application completely acceptable to Architect. I. Primers shall be as called for by manufacturer of paint used and as approved by the Architect. PAINTING 099103-2 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Before work is started, this Contractor shall submit in duplicate color chips and a program showing the type of paint to be used on each different surface in the building. Do not start work until this submittal is approved. B. Prepare samples of finishes on the job, to the satisfaction of the Architect. If required by the Architect, 4' x 8' portions of wall surface shall be finished for each different color selected. C. One room and/or area, as selected by the Architect, shall be painted with materials specified or accepted, and applied directly from container, unthinned. After acceptance by Architect, room and/or area shall be standard of quality of entire project. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver unadulterated products to building site in unbroken packages or containers, bearing manufacturer's labels. B. Materials shall be stored and locked in watertight shed well off the ground. 1.05 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Refer to Section 012500. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Painting contractor shall submit a written warranty that his work is guaranteed against peeling, discoloration, crazing, cracking or other failures due to preparation, workmanship or materials for a period of two (2) years after the date of Substantial Completion. 1.07 ASBESTOS AND ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS A. The use of any construction process or the installation of any asbestos or material containing asbestos is strictly prohibited for this project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Paint 1. Devoe & Raynolds 2. Pratt & Lambert 3. Pittsburgh Paints 4. Glidden Coatings and Resins 5. Benjamin Moore Co. 6. Kelly-Moore Paint Co., Inc. 7. Cook Paint Co. 8. James Bute Company 9. Fuller O'Brien *10. Sherwin-Williams B. Epoxy Paint 1. Glidden Coatings and Resins 2. Pittsburg Plate Glass Co. 3. Devoe & Raynolds *4. Sherwin-Williams PAINTING 099103-3 2.02 MATERIALS A. General 1. The following specifications for material and finishes are not intended to mention every particular item which will receive painter's finish, but is intended to establish type and quality of finish which will be required on various materials. 2. The Paint Finish Numbers that follow are typically used in the Architectural drawings, on the Room Finish Schedules, elevations and details to denote types and locations of various finishes hereinafter specified. 3. Paint brands and types listed below are for indication of quality of material required. Substitutions of equal products by one of the listed manufacturers may be made with the Architect's approval. 4. Gypsum Board Texture: Multi-Purpose Texture Finish by U.S.G. or approved equal. B. Type B Finishes - Interior 1.PB-1: Latex Enamel a. Locations: Used for interior gypsum board walls, wood, masonry, previously painted surfaces and elsewhere as scheduled. b. Finish: Pro Green 200 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel, 2 coats c. Film Thickness: 3.0 mils wet, 1.7 mils dry. d. Primers (1) New Surfaces: Drywall and Bare wood - Prime with Pro Green Interior Latex Primer B28W600 Series, 1 coat (2) Concrete Masonry Units: Prep Rite Block Filler, Interior/Exterior Latex, 1 coat (3) Previously Painted Surfaces: Fill cracks, etc. with latex-type filler, Porous flat finishes should be sealed with a coat of Prep Rite 200. 2.PB-2: Epoxy a. Locations: Used for interior gypsum board walls and masonry walls scheduled to receive epoxy. b. Finish: Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy, 2 coats c. Primers (1) Drywall: Prep Rite 200 Latex Primer, 1 coat (2) Concrete Masonry Units: Kem Cati-Coat Epoxy filler/sealer 3.PB-3: Alkyd Enamel a. Locations: Ferrous and Galvanized Metals b. Finish: ProClassic XP Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss, 2 coats c. Primer (1) Galvanized Metal: Galvite HS Primer, 1 coat (2) Steel, Alkyd Primer: All surface Enamel Oil Primer, 1 coat 4.PB-4: Transparent Finish a. Locations: Used on wood doors and miscellaneous trim scheduled to be stained finish. b. Finish: Wood Classics Fast Dry Varnish - A66-300, 2 coats. c. Undercoats: (1) Wood Classics Oil Stain, 1 coat (2) Wood Classics Sanding Sealer, 1 coat 2.03 COLORS A. Colors shall be as selected by Architect. Different colors may be selected for each and every room, and more than one color may be selected in each and every room. PAINTING 099103-4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Notify Contractor of any surface not in proper condition to be finished before proceeding with the work. Starting work will constitute the painter's acceptance of preceding work and conditions under which finish will be applied and his assumption of responsibility for results to be obtained. 3.02 PREPARATION A. General: Surfaces to be finished must be clean, dry and free of dirt, oils, loose paint or any other contamination that would adversely affect adhesion, protective properties or appearance of the coating. B. Finished woodwork: Remove all dirt, stains grade marks from surfaces to receive transparent finishes. Sand all surfaces to receive finishes smooth and dry brush clean. Wash knots and pitch pockets with mineral spirits, then seal with appropriate sealer. After first coat of primer or stain, neatly putty nail holes and cracks flush with adjoining surfaces. Apply paste wood filler on open grain woods. Wipe when set to obtain smooth, even appearance. Prime millwork and tops and bottoms of doors immediately upon arrival at job site. C. Zinc alloy or Galvanized Metal Work: Clean with solvent or use commercial pre- treatment solution as directed by manufacturer's instructions. D. Shop-Coated Metal Work: Remove all foreign matter and clean thoroughly. Abraded areas shall be spot-primed with the proper primer. E. Ferrous Metal Work: Clean metal surfaces not provided with prime coat by others, of rust, millscale, grease and foreign matter. F. Drywall Surfaces: Ensure that surfaces are taped, cemented and sanded, ready to receive paint. Correct minor surface defects. Dust and clean surfaces before painting. Apply light stipple texture in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction. G. Concrete and Plaster Surfaces: Clean surfaces of all foreign matter. Repair all minor defects with suitable patching material. Test paint-receiving surfaces for presence of alkali; if present, neutralize with suitable neutralizing compounds. H. Back-Priming: Back-prime wood trim and other woodwork installed against steel, concrete and plaster with one coat of primer specified for that exposed surface. I. Previously Painted or Stained Surfaces: Surfaces to be finished must be clean, dry and free of dirt, oils, loose paint, gloss, or any other contamination that would adversely affect adhesion, protective properties or appearance of the coating. 1. Remove all loose, chipped, peeling or blistered paint by hand tool, power tool, or sand blast cleaning. 2. All oil, grease, dirt or foreign matter to be removed by washing with a solution of Tri-sodium Phosphate and water, rinse and allow surface to dry. 3. If efflorescence, alkali or glazed surfaces exit, neutralize with diluted muriatic acid wash followed by thorough water rinse. 4. Point up mortar joints, cracks, voids and other surface defects with suitable patching compounds. Examine all surfaces on site to determine job conditions and degree of surface preparation necessary. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Allow exterior paints to dry 72 hours between coats and interior paints to dry 24 hours between coats. Allow all enamels and varnishes to dry 24 hours between costs. If enamel and varnishes are tacky after 24 hours, allow additional time until finish is dry. B. Perform all work under favorable weather conditions. C. Backpaint all interior wood finish concealed surfaces. D. Refer to plans for locations of various finishes. E. Best workmanship will be required with all materials spread and smoothly flowed on PAINTING 099103-5 without runs, streaks, sags, brush marks, unfinished patches or other blemishes. F. Employ only skilled mechanics. G. Painter option: Painter may remove all hardware other than butts and door closers prior to finishing doors and replacing same or mask them with heavy paper and tape. Tape shall not be stuck to hardware, but shall be used to hold paper in place. Failure to do either will require hardware to be replaced or require hardware to be removed and returned to manufacturer for reapplication of special infra-red baked lacquer protective cover at paint contractor's expense. If left in place, plated butts shall be protected as mentioned above. H. Number of coats specified for paint are minimum required under optimum conditions. Where additional coats are required for color coverage, filling of pinholes, smoothness or uniformity, painting contractor shall be responsible for applying additional coats of material. I. All work where a coat of material has been applied must be inspected and approved by Architect before application of succeeding specified coat; otherwise no credit for coat applied will be given. Notify Architect when a particular coat has been completed for inspection and approval. J. Apply coats of material in strict accordance with manufacturer's specifications except where requirements of these specifications are in excess of manufacturer's requirements. K. Chemically remove finish on all existing wood doors, sand, fill voids and scratches, then apply new finish. END OF SECTION 099103 PAINTING 099103-6 THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY FOR PROPER DOUBLE SIDED PRINTING. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 1 SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Operation and maintenance data. C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. 2. Warranty Period: Six (6)years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide #MP Series by Larsen Manufacturing. or comparable product by one of the following: a. Amerex Corporation. b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd. c. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company. d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. e. Fire End & Croker Corporation. f. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. g. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc. h. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. i. Moon-American. j. Pem All Fire Extinguisher Corp.; a division of PEM Systems, Inc. k. Potter Roemer LLC. l. Pyro-Chem; Tyco Safety Products. 3. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 2 B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type FE-1: UL-rated 10 lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container. C. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type FE-2: UL-rated 20 lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container. 2.2 MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or red baked-enamel finish. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Larsen Manufacturing standard bracket for MP Series (546 or 577). or comparable product by one of the following: a. Amerex Corporation. b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd. c. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company. d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. e. Fire End & Croker Corporation. f. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. g. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. h. Potter Roemer LLC. B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. 1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface. a. Orientation: Vertical. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. B. Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Mounting Brackets: Mount above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher shall comply with current TAS/ADA Standards. Refer to drawings. C. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated. END OF SECTION 104416 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 133419 - 1 SECTION 133419 - METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Structural-steel framing. 2. Metal Roofing Panels. 3. Metal Wall Panels. 4. Accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of metal building system component. B. Shop Drawings: For metal building system components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal building systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data and calculations signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. E. Welding certificates. F. Metal Building System Certificates: For each type of metal building system, from manufacturer. 1. Letter of Design Certification: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Include the following: a. Name and location of Project. b. Order number. c. Name of manufacturer. d. Name of Contractor. e. Building dimensions including width, length, height, and roof slope. f. Indicate compliance with AISC standards for hot-rolled steel and AISI standards for cold-rolled steel, including edition dates of each standard. g. Governing building code and year of edition. h. Design Loads: Include dead load, roof live load, collateral loads, roof snow load, deflection, wind loads/speeds and exposure, seismic design category or effective peak velocity-related acceleration/peak acceleration, and auxiliary loads (cranes). i. Load Combinations: Indicate that loads were applied acting simultaneously with concentrated loads, according to governing building code. j. Building-Use Category: Indicate category of building use and its effect on load importance factors. k. AISC Certification for Category MB: Include statement that metal building system and components were designed and produced in an AISC-Certified Facility by an AISC-Certified Manufacturer. G. Material test reports. H. Source quality-control reports. I. Field quality-control reports. J. Maintenance data. K. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer and member of MBMA. 1. AISC Certification for Category MB: An AISC-Certified Manufacturer that designs and produces metal building systems and components in an AISC-Certified Facility. 2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer. METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 133419 - 2 B. Erector Qualifications: An experienced erector who specializes in erecting and installing work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." D. Structural Steel: Comply with AISC 360, "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings," for design requirements and allowable stresses. E. Cold-Formed Steel: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold- Formed Steel Structural Members" for design requirements and allowable stresses. F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty on Metal Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Weathertightness Warranty for Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace standing-seam metal roof panel assemblies that leak or otherwise fail to remain weathertight within specified warranty period. 1.Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Installation Warranty: The installation of the metal roofing system shall be warranted by the installation contractor for a period of two (2) years from the date of substantial completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. A&S Building Systems, Inc.; Division of NCI Building Systems, L.P. 2. Alliance Steel, Inc. 3. American Buildings Company; Division of Magnatrax Corp. 4. American Steel Building Co., Inc. 5. BC Steel Buildings, Inc. 6. Butler Manufacturing Company; a BlueScope Steel company. 7. Ceco Building Systems; Division of NCI Building Systems, L.P. 8. Metallic Building Company; Division of NCI Building Systems, L.P. 9. Metco Metal Supply. 10. Mid-West Steel Building Company; Division of NCI Building Systems, L.P. 11. Nucor Building Systems. 12. Olympia Steel Building Systems. 13. Pinnacle Structures, Inc. 14. Rigid Building Systems 15. Schulte Building Systems, LLP. 16. Star Building Systems; an NCI company. 17. Tyler Building Systems, L.P. 18. USA, Inc. 19. VP Buildings; a United Dominion company. 20. Vulcan Steel Structures, Inc. 21. Whirlwind Building Systems. METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 133419 - 3 2.2 METAL BUILDING SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. Delegated Design: Design metal building system, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Structural Performance: Metal building systems shall be designed according to procedures in MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual." 1. Design Loads: As required by MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual. 2. Deflection Limits: Design metal building system assemblies to withstand design loads with deflections no greater than the following: a. Purlins and Rafters: Vertical deflection of 1/180 of the span. b. Girts: Horizontal deflection of 1/240 of the span. c. Metal Roof Panels: Vertical deflection of 1/180 of the span. d. Metal Wall Panels: Horizontal deflection of 1/180 of the span. e. Design secondary-framing system to accommodate deflection of primary framing and construction tolerances, and to maintain clearances at openings. 1. Drift Limits: Engineer building structure to withstand design loads with drift limits no greater than the following: a. Lateral Drift: Maximum of 1/240 of the building height. 2. Metal panel assemblies shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASTM E 1592. C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. D. Air Infiltration for Metal Roof Panels: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.3 L/s per sq. m] of roof area when tested according to ASTM E 1680 at negative test-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa). E. Air Infiltration for Metal Wall Panels: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.3 L/s per sq. m) of wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at static-air- pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa). F. Water Penetration for Metal Roof Panels: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 1646 at test-pressure difference of 2.86 lbf/sq. ft. (137 Pa). G. Water Penetration for Metal Wall Panels: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a wind-load design pressure of not less than 2.86 lbf/sq. ft. (137 Pa). H. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for Class 90. 2.3 STRUCTURAL-STEEL FRAMING A. Primary Framing: Manufacturer's standard primary-framing system, designed to withstand required loads and specified requirements. Primary framing includes transverse and lean-to frames; rafter, rake, and canopy beams; sidewall, intermediate, end-wall, and corner columns; and wind bracing. 1. General: Provide frames with attachment plates, bearing plates, and splice members. Factory drill for field-bolted assembly. 2. Frame Configuration: Single gable. 3. Exterior Column Type: Tapered. 4. Rafter Type: Tapered. B. End-Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard primary end-wall framing fabricated for field- bolted assembly. C. Secondary Framing: Manufacturer's standard secondary framing, including purlins, girts, eave struts, flange bracing, base members, gable angles, clips, headers, jambs, and other miscellaneous structural members. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate framing from either METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 133419 - 4 cold-formed, structural-steel sheet or roll-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet, prepainted with coil coating. D. Bolts: Provide plain-finish bolts for structural-framing components that are primed or finish painted. Provide zinc-plated or hot-dip galvanized bolts for structural-framing components that are galvanized. E. Finish: Factory primed. Apply specified primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 2.4 METAL ROOF PANELS A. General: Provide factory-formed metal soffit panels as specified in Section 074113 METAL ROOF PANELS. Include accessories required for weathertight installation. B. Metal Roof Panels: 1. Finish: Match existing finish and color of metal roof panels unless indicated on Drawings. 2. Basis of Design: MBCI SuperLok Panel 3. Uplift Rating: UL 90 2.5 METAL WALL PANELS A. General: Provide factory-formed metal soffit panels as specified in Section 074213 METAL WALL PANELS. Include accessories required for weathertight installation. B. Metal Wall Panels: 1. Finish: Match existing finish and color of metal wall panels unless indicated on Drawings. 2. Basis of Design: MBCI FW Panel 2.6 METAL SOFFIT PANELS A. General: Provide factory-formed metal soffit panels as specified in Section 074113 METAL ROOF PANELS. Include accessories required for weathertight installation. B. Metal Soffit Panels: Match material of metal wall panels. 1. Finish: Match finish and color of metal wall panels unless indicated on Drawings. 2. Basis of Design: MBCI ARTISAN Panel 2.7 THERMAL INSULATION A. Faced Metal Building Insulation: ASTM C 991, Type II, glass-fiber-blanket insulation; 0.5-lb/cu. ft. (8-kg/cu. m)density; 2-inch-(51-mm-)wide, continuous, vapor-tight edge tabs; with a flame- spread index of 25 or less. B. Thermal Resistance: R=30 at bottom of roof deck @ 75 degrees F mean temperature. C. Smoke Developed Index: 50 or less, when tested in accordance with UL 723. D. UL Classified E.Facing: White vinyl at all locations; embossed, 0.0032" (0.08 mm) =/- 10% thick; permeance in compliance with ASTM E96 1.00 perm (57 ng/PA s sq m). Composite fiberglass and facing to meet Flame Spread of 25 or less, Smoke Developed of 50 or less, when tested in accordance with UL 723. F. Provide facing 3" (75mm) wider on both edges than blanket. G. Width: As required for installation. 2.8 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide accessories as standard with metal building system manufacturer and as specified. Fabricate and finish accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. 1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil-canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. B. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels unless otherwise indicated. C. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, sealants, gaskets, fillers, METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 133419 - 5 closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels unless otherwise indicated. D. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.022-inch (0.56-mm) nominal-thickness, metallic-coated steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match adjacent metal panels. E. Gutters: Formed from 0.022-inch (0.56-mm) nominal-thickness, metallic-coated steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match roof fascia and rake trim. Match profile of gable trim, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2438-mm-) long sections, sized according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." 1. Gutter Supports: Fabricated from same material and finish as gutters. 2. Strainers: Bronze, copper, or aluminum wire ball type at outlets. F. Downspouts: Formed from 0.022-inch (0.56-mm) nominal-thickness, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match metal wall panels. Fabricate in minimum 10-foot- (3-m-) long sections, complete with formed elbows and offsets. 1. Mounting Straps: Fabricated from same material and finish as gutters. G. Roof Curbs: Fabricated from minimum 0.052-inch (1.32-mm) nominal-thickness, metallic- coated steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match metal roof panels; capable of withstanding loads of size and height indicated. H. Pipe Flashing: Premolded, EPDM pipe collar with flexible aluminum ring bonded to base. 2.9 FABRICATION A. General: Design components and field connections required for erection to permit easy assembly. 1. Mark each piece and part of the assembly to correspond with previously prepared erection drawings, diagrams, and instruction manuals. 2. Fabricate structural framing to produce clean, smooth cuts and bends. Punch holes of proper size, shape, and location. Members shall be free of cracks, tears, and ruptures. B. Tolerances: Comply with MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual" for fabrication and erection tolerances. C. Primary Framing: Shop fabricate framing components to size and section, with baseplates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other items required for erection welded into place. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld framing for bolted field assembly. D. Secondary Framing: Shop fabricate framing components to size and section by roll-forming or break-forming, with baseplates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other plates required for erection welded into place. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld secondary framing for bolted field connections to primary framing. E. Metal Panels: Fabricate and finish metal panels at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL FRAMING A. Erect metal building system according to manufacturer's written erection instructions and erection drawings. B. Do not field cut, drill, or alter structural members without written approval from metal building system manufacturer's professional engineer. C. Set structural framing accurately in locations and to elevations indicated, according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section. Maintain structural stability of frame during erection. D. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 133419 - 6 1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout. 3. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts. E. Align and adjust structural framing before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with framing. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure will be completed and in service. F. Primary Framing and End Walls: Erect framing level, plumb, rigid, secure, and true to line. Level baseplates to a true even plane with full bearing to supporting structures, set with double- nutted anchor bolts. Use grout to obtain uniform bearing and to maintain a level base-line elevation. Moist-cure grout for not less than seven days after placement. 1. Make field connections using high-strength bolts installed according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for bolt type and joint type specified. a. Joint Type: Snug tightened or pretensioned. G. Secondary Framing: Erect framing level, plumb, rigid, secure, and true to line. Field bolt secondary framing to clips attached to primary framing. 1. Provide rake or gable purlins with tight-fitting closure channels and fasciae. 2. Locate and space wall girts to suit openings such as doors and windows. 3. Locate canopy framing as indicated on drawings. 4. Provide supplemental framing at entire perimeter of openings, including doors, windows, louvers, ventilators, and other penetrations of roof and walls. H. Bracing: Install bracing in roof and sidewalls where indicated on erection drawings. 1. Tighten rod and cable bracing to avoid sag. 2. Locate interior end-bay bracing only where indicated. I. Framing for Openings: Provide shapes of proper design and size to reinforce openings and to carry loads and vibrations imposed, including equipment furnished under mechanical and electrical work. Securely attach to structural framing. J. Erection Tolerances: Maintain erection tolerances of structural framing within AISC 303. 3.2 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Field cut metal panels as required for doors, windows, and other openings. Cut openings as small as possible, neatly to size required, and without damage to adjacent metal panel finishes. a. Field cutting of metal panels by torch is not permitted unless approved in writing by manufacturer. 2. Install metal panels perpendicular to structural supports unless otherwise indicated. 3. Flash and seal metal panels with weather closures at perimeter of openings and similar elements. Fasten with self-tapping screws. 4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 5. Locate metal panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports with end laps in alignment. 6. Lap metal flashing over metal panels to allow moisture to run over and off the material. B. Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Install screw fasteners using power tools with controlled torque adjusted to compress EPDM washers tightly without damage to washers, screw threads, or metal panels. Install screws in predrilled holes. METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 133419 - 7 1. Arrange and nest side-lap joints so prevailing winds blow over, not into, lapped joints. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation. Apply metal panels and associated items for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line. C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with corrosion-resistant coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. D. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of metal panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants recommended by metal panel manufacturer. 1. Seal metal panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant the full width of panel. Seal side joints where recommended by metal panel manufacturer. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.3 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge unless otherwise indicated or restricted by shipping limitations. 1. Install ridge or hip caps as metal roof panel work proceeds. 2. Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves and rakes. Fasten with self-tapping screws. B. Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint, at location and spacing and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. 1. Install clips to supports with self-drilling or self-tapping fasteners. 2. Install pressure plates at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved motorized seamer tool so that clip, metal roof panel, and factory-applied sealant are completely engaged. 4. Rigidly fasten eave end of metal roof panels and allow ridge end free movement due to thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels for fasteners. 5. Provide metal closures at peaks and each side of ridge and hip caps. C. Metal Fascia Panels: Align bottom of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self- drilling or self-tapping screws. Flash and seal metal panels with weather closures where fasciae meet soffits, along lower panel edges, and at perimeter of all openings. 3.4 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal wall panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to girts, extending full height of building, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, begin metal panel installation at corners with center of rib lined up with line of framing. 2. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal wall panels. 3. When two rows of metal panels are required, lap panels 4 inches (102 mm) minimum. 4. When building height requires two rows of metal panels at gable ends, align lap of gable panels over metal wall panels at eave height. 5. Rigidly fasten base end of metal wall panels and allow eave end free movement due to thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels. 6. Flash and seal metal wall panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws. 7. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes. 8. Install flashing and trim as metal wall panel work proceeds. METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 133419 - 8 9. Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and concrete, and elsewhere as indicated; or, if not indicated, as necessary for waterproofing. 10. Align bottom of metal wall panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-drilling or self- tapping screws. 11. Provide weatherproof escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls. B. Metal Wall Panels: Install metal wall panels on exterior side of girts. Attach metal wall panels to supports with fasteners as recommended by manufacturer. 3.5 METAL SOFFIT PANEL INSTALLATION A. Provide metal soffit panels the full width of soffits. Install panels perpendicular to support framing. B. Flash and seal metal soffit panels with weather closures where panels meet walls and at perimeter of all openings. 3.6 THERMAL INSULATION INSTALLATION A. General: Install insulation concurrently with metal panel installation, in thickness indicated to cover entire surface, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder toward warm side of construction unless otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces except for firestopping. 2. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to the surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation. 3. Install factory-laminated, vapor-retarder-faced blankets straight and true in one-piece lengths, with both sets of facing tabs sealed, to provide a complete vapor retarder. B. Blanket Roof Insulation: Comply with the following installation method: 1. Over-Purlin-with-Spacer-Block Installation: Extend insulation and vapor retarder over and perpendicular to top flange of secondary framing. Install layer of filler insulation over first layer to fill space formed by metal roof panel standoffs. Hold in place by panels fastened to standoffs. a. Thermal Spacer Blocks: Where metal roof panels attach directly to purlins, install thermal spacer blocks. 2. Retainer Strips: Install retainer strips at each longitudinal insulation joint, straight and taut, nesting with secondary framing to hold insulation in place. 3. Tape or heat weld all seams and overlaps in vinyl facing do diminish visibility of seams for aesthetic purposes. 4. Ensure protection of vinyl facing from damage, tears or punctures during construction for all areas of exposed facing. C. Blanket Wall Insulation: Extend insulation and vapor retarder over and perpendicular to top flange of secondary framing. Hold in place by metal wall panels fastened to secondary framing. 1. Retainer Strips: Install retainer strips at each longitudinal insulation joint, straight and taut, nesting with secondary framing to hold insulation in place. 2. Sound-Absorption Insulation: Where sound-absorption requirement is indicated for metal liner panels, cover insulation with polyethylene film and provide inserts of wire mesh to form acoustical spacer grid. 3.7 DOOR AND FRAME INSTALLATION A. General: Install doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place according to manufacturers' written instructions. Coordinate installation with wall flashings and other components. Seal perimeter of each door frame with elastomeric sealant used for metal wall panels. B. Personnel Doors and Frames: Install doors and frames according to SDI A250.8. C. Field Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing." METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 133419 - 9 3.8 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly, including trim, copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. 2. Install components for a complete metal wall panel assembly, including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. 3. Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with corrosion-resistant coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil-canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance. 2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). C. Gutters: Join sections with riveted-and-soldered or lapped-and-sealed joints. Attach gutters to eave with gutter hangers spaced as required for gutter size, but not more than 36 inches (914 mm) o.c. using manufacturer's standard fasteners. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. D. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch (25 mm) away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches (1524 mm) o.c. in between. 1. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building. E. Circular Roof Ventilators: Set ventilators complete with necessary hardware, anchors, dampers, weather guards, rain caps, and equipment supports. Mount ventilators on flat level base. Install preformed filler strips at base to seal ventilator to metal roof panels. F. Continuous Roof Ventilators: Set ventilators complete with necessary hardware, anchors, dampers, weather guards, rain caps, and equipment supports. Join sections with splice plates and end-cap skirt assemblies where required to achieve indicated length. Install preformed filler strips at base to seal ventilator to metal roof panels. G. Roof Curbs: Install curbs at locations indicated on Drawings. Install flashing around bases where they meet metal roof panels. H. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels. Fasten and seal to panel as recommended by manufacturer. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and/or Special Inspections: 1. Provide only when required by owner or local jurisdiction. 2. Provide in manners stated below or as required to meet local jurisdiction B. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform special inspections. C. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. D. Tests and Inspections: METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 133419 - 10 1. High-Strength, Field-Bolted Connections: Connections shall be inspected during installation according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 2. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, field-welded connections shall be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at inspector's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. E. Product will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 133419 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1 SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting final completion construction photographic documentation. 2. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 3. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete with request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect or Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 2 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion. 1.3 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training information and manuals. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect or Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 2. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. b. [2] Two paper copies, unless otherwise indicated. 1.5 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. 4. Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide table of contents at beginning of document. C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 1. Use cleaning products that meet Green Seal GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. k. Remove labels that are not permanent. l. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. n. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 4 p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. q. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. r. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report. END OF SECTION 017700 TERMITE CONTROL 313116 - 1 SECTION 313116 - TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Soil treatment with termiticide. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the EPA-Registered Label for termiticide products. B. Product certificates. C. Soil Treatment Application Report: Include the following: 1. Date and time of application. 2. Moisture content of soil before application. 3. Termiticide brand name and manufacturer. 4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used. 5. Dilutions, methods, volumes used, and rates of application. 6. Areas of application. 7. Water source for application. D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project is located and who employs workers trained and approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products. B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides and termiticide devices according to the EPA-Registered Label. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with requirements of the EPA-Registered Label and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, grading, and concreting operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-supported slabs before construction. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Soil Treatment Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and Contractor, certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL TREATMENT A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA-Registered termiticide, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to product's EPA-Registered Label. TERMITE CONTROL 313116 - 2 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BASF Corporation, Agricultural Products; Termidor. b. Bayer Environmental Science; Premise 75. c. FMC Corporation, Agricultural Products Group; Talstar. d. Syngenta; Prelude. 2. Service Life of Treatment: Soil treatment termiticide that is effective for not less than five years against infestation of subterranean termites. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION, GENERAL A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products. 3.2 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for moisture content of soil per termiticide label requirements, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, utility installation, and other conditions affecting performance of termite control. B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing by termiticide manufacturer. 1. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. Distribute treatment evenly. 1. Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs: Under ground-supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed. 2. Foundations: Adjacent soil, including soil along the entire inside perimeter of foundation walls; along both sides of interior partition walls; around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating the slab; around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; and along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings. E. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry. F. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground- supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label instructions. G. Post warning signs in areas of application. H. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application. END OF SECTION 313116 Standard –1000120011 32 31 13 - 1 Chain Link Fence SECTION 32 31 13 CHAIN LINK FENCE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY This section gives requirements for chain link fencing including gates, posts and all accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS Section 03 30 53 – Cast-In-Place Concrete 1.03 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Chain link fencing will be paid for under the lump sum bid price unless otherwise indicated in the bid form. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Chain link fencing shall include all gates, wire, posts, braces, fabric and other required accessories. 1.05 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit four (4) copies of each submittal, which will be retained by the Engineer, plus the number of copies that are to be returned to Contractor by Engineer after review is completed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers. All materials and/or equipment specified herein shall be provided by an acceptable manufacturer or a pre-approved equal. Acceptable manufacturers are as follows: 1. Cyclone Invincible, 2. American Steel and Wire Division, 3. United States Steel Corporation. 2.02 MATERIALS AND/OR EQUIPMENT A. Fabric. Galvanized in accordance with ATM A 153, 1.2 oz. zinc per square foot, 70,000 pounds per square inch tensile strength wire. Furnish No. 9 gauge copper bearing, open hearth steel wire woven in a two (2) inch mesh unless otherwise shown on the plans. Standard –1000120011 32 31 13 - 2 Chain Link Fence Fabric shall be galvanized by a hot-dip process after weaving. Fabric height for both fencing and gates shall be six (6) feet unless shown otherwise on plans. B. Posts. All posts shall be standard, full weight steel tubing. Posts shall be of such length that they may be embedded into concrete to a depth of not less than thirty-six (36) inches. Posts provided shall be of the following types, sizes and weights: Type of Post O.D. of Tubing Minimum Weight Line 2 3/8-inches 3.65 lb/LF Gate 4-inches 9.11 lb/LF Corner, Angle, End or Pull 2 7/8-inches 5.79 lb/LF C. Top Rails. Provide 1 5/8-inch outer diameter, standard full weight tubular steel post weighing 2.27 pounds per linear foot. D. Intermediate Rail: For fence fabric height of 8’ or more, provide at mid-height, 1 5/8-inch outer diameter, standard full weight tubular steel pipe weighing 2.27 pounds per linear foot. E. Gates. Type, width and location of gates shall be as shown on plans and shall conform to the following: 1. Frames. Furnish two (2) inch outside diameter galvanized pipe with pressed steel or malleable iron corner ells, securely riveted with four (4) rivets per corner. Welded corners are acceptable for pressed steel corner ells. 2. Internal Bracing. Provide 1 5/8-inch outside diameter pipe and 3/8-inch adjustable truss rods. 3. Hardware. Furnish a malleable iron ball and socket bottom hinge and a 180 degree wrap-around type top hinge to allow gate to swing 90 degrees or 180 degrees. Provide a padlocking device, center rests, and semi-automatic catch to secure driveway gates in open position. Provide heavy duty padlock with three (3) keys for each gate. Locks shall be accessible from both sides of gate(s). For cantilevered roll gates provide necessary number of rollers, brace posts, etc. to facilitate specified gate width. F. Tension Wire. Bottom tension wire shall be No. 7 gauge, galvanized coil tension wire. G. Hog Rings. Use No. 11 gauge, galvanized hog rings for fastening the fabric to the bottom tension wire. H. End, Corner and Gate Post Bracing. Provide 1 5/8-inch outside diameter tubular steel weighing 2.27 pounds per linear foot. Provide 3/8-inch diameter truss rods. I. Fittings. Furnish cast iron, wrought iron or pressed steel fittings. J. Stretcher Bars. Provide stretcher bars which are not less than 3/16-inch by 3/4-inch in cross section. Stretcher bars shall of the lengths required for the full height of the fabric installed. Standard –1000120011 32 31 13 - 3 Chain Link Fence One (1) stretcher bar shall be provided for gate post and two (2) for each corner, pull or end post. K. Accessories. Accessories are all parts required for complete installation of chain link fence except for fabric, posts, and gate frames. Use accessories of the manufacturer's standard design. L. Barbed Wire and Supporting Arms. Barbed wire shall be two (2) strand, No. 12 1/2 gauge galvanized steel wire with four (4) point barbs and be of domestic origin. Barbed wire supporting arms shall be fabricated such that a forty-five (45) degree angle is maintained with the vertical plane of the chain link fence and shall be of such length that the top wire is twelve (12) inches horizontally from the fence line. Supporting arms shall be such that three (3) strands of barbed wire can be attached at equal spacing. The three (3) strands of barbed wire shall be attached to the supporting arms by tie clips of adequate strength. 2.03 FABRICATION All components of the chain link fence shall be hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION / INSTALLATION / APPLICATION AND/OR CONSTRUCTION Erect the fence in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's recommendations. A. Posts. 1. Spacing and Alignment. Line posts shall be spaced not more that ten (10) feet on center between terminal posts. Post holes and posts shall be accurately centered along the line of the fence. 2. Setting. Posts shall be set to the proper elevation along the line of the fence and in the center of the excavation for the concrete footing. A twelve (12) inch by thirty- six (36) inch concrete footing shall be constructed for each post. The posts shall be braced in a plumb and true position until the concrete has been poured and allowed to cure. Concrete for the footing shall be 3000 psi strength and conform to the requirements of Division III, Concrete. The top of the footing shall be rounded or beveled such that drainage is away from the post. 3. Bracing. Bracing members shall be installed at all end, corner, and gate posts. Space midway between the top rail and the ground and extend to first line post. Fasten to the post with malleable iron or pressed steel connections and provide a truss rod from the first line post back to the end, corner, or gate post. B. Bottom Tension Wire, Stretcher Bars, Miscellaneous, and Accessory Items. Erect and install in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's recommendation. C. Fabric. Install so as to clear top of ground at all locations, but not to exceed two (2) inches. Standard –1000120011 32 31 13 - 4 Chain Link Fence Fabric shall be installed in accordance with the methods recommended by the manufacturer. Sufficient stress shall be applied to the fabric to take up all slack and present a smooth uniform surface along the line of the fence. Distortion of the fabric by over-stretching shall be avoided. Suitable tie wire, clips or bands, as recommended by the manufacturer, shall be used to attach the fabric to the line posts at fourteen (14) inch spacing and to the top rail at twenty-four (24) inch spacing. Attach fabric to bottom tension wire with hog clips at twenty- four (24) inch spacing. D. Gates. Gates shall be installed so as to freely swing or roll and not drag or bind in openings. Hinges for swing gates shall be set so as not to twist or turn under the action of the gate. Swing gates shall be easily swung back as far as possible and held in the open position by gate stops. E. Barbed Wire. Barbed wire shall be pulled taut and adequately attached to supporting arms. 3.02 ADJUSTING / CLEANING Perform the following miscellaneous earthwork as needed, or when directed by Engineer: A. Excavate or fill along fence line as required to meet specified clearance for bottom of fabric. Cut and fill in a manner to prevent ponding. B. Furnish and install borrow material for fill along fence line when excavated material is not of top soil quality. Borrow material for fill shall be top soil. C. Remove surplus excavated material from the project site or spread the material uniformly as directed by Engineer. END OF SECTION